Sie sind auf Seite 1von 481

Advanced Vibrations

Advanced Vibrations

Hello:

Sign In
Sylabus
Homework, Projects, Exams, Grading
Office Hours
Facilities
http://me.unm.edu/~djsegal/
Calibration
Calendar

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Advanced Vibrations
Overview
Advanced Vibrations

Core Elements

Frequency Domain Analysis


Energy Methods
Continuous Systems
Systems of Many D.O.F.s & Eigenanalysis

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Lumped Mass Single DOF System
Elements:
Advanced Vibrations

Spring: F = kx
k

c Damper: F = cẋ

m Mass: F = mẋ˙

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Lumped Mass Single DOF System
Assembled System:
Advanced Vibrations

k F
m

Applied force F ( t ) is balanced by acceleration of mass,


stroke of damper, and displacment of spring:

mẋ˙ + cẋ + kx = F ( t )

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Lumped Mass Single DOF System
Simplification by Mass Normalization
Advanced Vibrations

Dividing through by the mass (we shall do this again later with multi-dof
systems):

2
ẋ˙ + 2ζω n ẋ + ω n x = f ( t )
where

c k 2 F (t)
---- = 2ζ , ---- = ω n , and ---------- = f ( t )
m m m

Recall: ω n is the undamped natural frequency;

and ζ is fraction of critical damping. (Note: ζ is pronounced “zeta”.)

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Lumped Mass Single DOF System
About the Differential Operator
Advanced Vibrations

2
d d 2
Note that the operator L = 2
( ) + 2ζω ndt ( ) + ω n ( ) has the
dt
properties:

L is Linear: L ( f + g ) = L ( f ) + L ( g )

and L is time-translation invarient: L ( x ( t + T ) ) = L ( x ) t+T

This means that transform methods work for this sort of problem. We
shall discuss this more next time.

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Lumped Mass Single DOF System
An Additional Special Normalization
Advanced Vibrations

Nondimensionalization of equation for single DOF system:

Let τ = ωn t and let y ( τ ) = x ( τ ⁄ ω n ) , then


2 2
dy 1 dy 1
= -----2- dx , = -----2- d x
dτ ωn d t t = τ ⁄ ωn dτ
2
ωn d t 2 t = τ ⁄ ωn

f ( τ ⁄ ωn ) F ( τ ⁄ ωn )
and y'' ( τ ) + 2ζy' ( τ ) + y ( τ ) = --------------------- = ----------------------
2 k
ωn

Say F ( t ) = Ak sin ( ωt ) , then

 ω
y'' ( τ ) + 2ζy' ( τ ) + y ( τ ) = A sin τ -
-----
 ω n

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Lumped Mass Single DOF System
Nondimensionalization
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the steady state solution of

y'' ( τ ) + 2ζy' ( τ ) + y ( τ ) = sin ( τα )

where α = ω ⁄ ω n , we anticipate a solution of the sort

y ( τ ) = H̃ ( α ) sin ( τα – ψ̃ ( α ) )

If we solve forH̃ ( α ) and ψ̃ ( α ) for all α for a fixed ζ we have the


steady state solution for all single DOF systems with that value of ζ .

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Please read the first chapter of


Meirovitch
Life will be easier for you to read
one chapter ahead.

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Homework Number 1
Advanced Vibrations

1. Solve the transient Single DOF problem


y'' ( τ ) + 2ζy' ( τ ) + y ( τ ) = sin ( τα ) numerically using MATLAB
until steady state for values of α equal to 0 to 2.0 in increments of 0.1.

2. Plot H̃ ( α ) versus α
3. plot ψ̃ ( α ) versus α
4. Do this for the three values of ζ : 0.01, 0.1, 1.0

Hint: Let v = y' and solve v' + 2ζ 1 v = sin ( ατ )


y –1 0 0

11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture1.frm
Slides of Lecture 2

Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class

• Homework

• Assembly of Systems from Components

• Convolutions with Indicial and Impulse


Response Functions

• Beginning of Fourier Analysis and the Complex


Operators

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Recalling Homework Number 1
Advanced Vibrations

1. Solve the transient Single DOF problem


y'' ( τ ) + 2ζy' ( τ ) + y ( τ ) = sin ( τα ) numerically using MATLAB
until steady state for values of α equal to 0 to 2.0 in increments of 0.1.

2. Plot H̃ ( α ) versus α
3. plot ψ̃ ( α ) versus α
4. Do this for the three values of ζ : 0.01, 0.1, 1.0

Hint: Let v = y' and solve v' + 2ζ 1 v = sin ( ατ )


y –1 0 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Solution
Having finished reading Chapter 1 of text
Advanced Vibrations

1
The transfer function H̃ is H̃ = --------------------------------
2
-
1 – α – i2ζα

The magnitude of H̃ is determined from

= H̃ H̃ ∗ = ----------------------------------------------
2 1

2 2 2
( 1 – α ) + ( 2ζα )
and the phase is determined from

Im ( H̃ ) ( H̃ – H̃ ∗ ) 2αζ
ψ̃ ( α ) = atan ---------------- = atan ------------------------- = atan --------------2-
Re ( H̃ ) i ( H̃ + H̃ ∗ ) 1–α
These are plotted as follows:

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Plots from Homework 1
Magnitude of Transfer Function
Advanced Vibrations

ζ=0.01

ζ=0.1
ζ=1.0

α=ω/ωο

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Plots from Homework 1
Phase of Transfer Function
Advanced Vibrations

ζ=0.01
ζ=0.1
ζ=1.0
arg ( H̃ )

α=ω/ωο

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Conclusions from Homework 1
Advanced Vibrations

• There are advantages to frequency analysis. We


shall see more of this later.

• It takes a slightly damped system a very long


time to reach steady state.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Advanced Vibrations

Recall that it was asserted that:


Intrinsic # DOF of System = #Masses X DOF/Mass
Consider the following system
u1 u2

M
K1 K2

Does this system have two degrees of freedom?


Should it have just one?
How do we reconcile this?

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Advanced Vibrations

Resolution is achieved through the elimination of massless degrees of


freedom - statically.
u1 u2

M
K1 K2

F1 , F2 F2 , FM M

As shown here, F1 and F2 are applied forces: F 1 = K 1 u1 ,


F 2 = K 2 ( u 2 – u 1 ) . FM is the force applied to the mass F M = Mu̇˙2

Balancing forces at a virtual mass at location x1 to deduce F1 = F2.

Balancing forces at the actual mass at location x2, F M = –F 2


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Advanced Vibrations

u1 u2

M
K1 K2

F1 , F2 F2 , FM M

K2 K 1K 2
From F 1 = F 2 , u 1 = -------------------- u 2 and F 1 = F 2 = -------------------- u 2
K1 + K2 K1 + K2

K 1K 2
From F M = – F 2, Mu̇˙2 = – -------------------- u 2 which is our desired single
K1 + K2
degree-of-freedom system.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Stating the Obvious
Advanced Vibrations

• The reaction forces on massless subsystems is


equal and opposite to the forces applied to them.

• Note that extra degrees of freedom are removed


by balancing forces and equating displacements.

• Constitutive expressions relate applied forces to


resulting kinematics.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Some More Complex Cases
Advanced Vibrations

Returning to the liquid-like second order system


u1 u2
FM
M M
C K

C F1
F2 F2

Recall the synthesis rules:


• The displacements at location 1 are implicitly continuous.

• The forces balance: F 1 = F 2 , and F 2 = – F M . Remember


that the constitutive equations relate applied force to resulting
kinematics.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Some More Complex Cases
Advanced Vibrations

Returning to the liquid-like second order system


u1 u2
FM
M M
C K

C F1
F2 F2

Recall the constitutive rules:


• F 1 = cu̇ 1
• F 2 = K ( u2 – u1 )
• F M = Mu̇˙2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Some More Complex Cases
Advanced Vibrations

Solving the system: u1 u2


FM

cu̇ 1 = K ( u 2 – u 1 ) and C K
M M

K ( u 2 – u 1 ) = – Mu̇˙2 . C F1
F2 F2

Setting λ = c ⁄ K , we solve the


t
–( t – τ ) ⁄ λ dτ
first to find: u1 ( t ) = ∫e u 2 ( τ ) -----
λ
0
which is substituted in to the dynamics equation to obtain the
t
 –( t – τ ) ⁄ λ dτ
governing equation Mu̇˙2 + K  u 2 – e


u 2 ( τ ) ----- =
λ
0.
0
This is tedious.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Using Laplace Transforms
Advanced Vibrations

cu̇ 1 = K ( u 2 – u 1 ) and K ( u 2 – u 1 ) = – Mu̇˙2

Becomes: csU 1 ( s ) – cu 1 ( 0 ) = K [ U 2 ( s ) – U 1 ( s ) ] and


2
K [ U 2 ( s ) – U 1 ( s ) ] + s MU 2 ( s ) = su̇ 2 ( 0 ) + u 2 ( 0 )

After solving out U 1 ( s ) , we have

2 cs cu 1 ( 0 )
s M + K ---------------- U 2 ( s ) = K ---------------- + M [ su̇ 2 ( 0 ) + u 2 ( 0 ) ] .
K + cs K + cs
It is good practice to normalize:

2 2 λs 2 λs
s + ω n --------------- U 2 ( s ) = ω n --------------- + [ su̇ 2 ( 0 ) + u 2 ( 0 ) ]
1 + λs 1 + λs

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Another Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Remember that we were told that


Intrinsic # DOF of System = #Masses X DOF/Mass

That was a lie.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Another Problem
Advanced Vibrations

So far today, we have considered homogeneous systems - those


without imposed forces.
Lets consider the following two systems:

System 1 u System 2 u1 u2

M M

Where boundary forces or displacements are applied


at massless degrees of freedom, we often retain
those degrees of freedom.

Often we resolve out degrees of freedom associated


with the masses.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Another Problem
Advanced Vibrations

System 1 System 2 u1 u2
K K
M c M
c K2

Governing equations for System 1: Mu̇˙ + cu̇ + Ku = F

For System 2: Mu̇˙1 + cu̇ 1 + K u 1 = K 2 ( u 2 – u 1 )

F = K 2 ( u2 – u1 )

Lets solve these subject to homogeneous initial conditions

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Impulse Response
Advanced Vibrations

Solve System 1: Mu̇˙ + cu̇ + Ku = F :


2
Using Laplace transforms, U (s) = ( F ) ( s ) ⁄ ( Ms + cs + K )
Transforming back to the time domain,

t
u(t ) = ∫ h ( t – τ )F ( τ ) dτ .
0

1 –1  1 
where h ( t ) = -----  ---------------------------------------
-
M  s + 2ζω n s + ω n
2 2

h is the impulse response function for this system.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
Impulse Response Function
Advanced Vibrations

If we have a system whose governing equation in response to a


imposed force is L ( u ) ( t ) = F ( t ) , having a Laplace transform
G(s) (u)(s) = ( F ) ( s ) , then
–1
h = (G)

is the impulse response function for that system. The resulting


t
displacement is u(t ) = ∫ h ( t – τ )F ( τ ) dτ
0

Note: h solves L ( h ) ( t ) = δ ( t )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Synthesis of Systems
The Integral of Duhamel
Advanced Vibrations

Similarly, if we define the indicial response function g:


t
u(t ) = ∫ g ( t – τ )Ḟ ( τ ) dτ + F ( 0 )g ( t )
0

g ( t ) solves the equation L ( g ) ( t ) = H ( t ) , where H is the Heavyside


step function.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Homework Number 2
Advanced Vibrations

Part A. Determine the impulse response function h ( t ) for System 1.


Assume that the system is under-damped ( ζ < 1 ).
Part B. Determine the indicial response function g ( t ) for System 1.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Homework Number 3
Advanced Vibrations

Part A. Resolve out the degree of freedom u1 associated with the mass
in System B to in favor of u2. Obtain a governing equation in a single
degree of freedom u2. You may leave this in Laplace transform space.

Part B. Determining the impulse response function for this problem.


This function lives in the time domain. Assume that the system is
under-damped.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Concepts from Complex Variable Analysis
A Reminder
Advanced Vibrations

General Notions

Complex number z = x + iy
Real and Imaginary operators: Re { x + iy } = x , Im { x + iy } = y
Complex Conjugate: ( x + iy )∗ = x – iy
1 1
Observe: Re { z } = ( z + z ) and Im { z } = - ( z – z∗ )
--
- ∗ ----
2 2i
Complex Function of a Complex Variable: f ( z ) = u ( z ) + iv ( z )
An Analytic Function has a Unique Derivative:

∂f ∂f ∂u ∂v ∂v ∂u
= ⇒ = and = –
∂x ∂ ( iy ) ∂ x ∂y ∂x ∂y

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Concepts from Complex Variable Analysis
A Reminder
Advanced Vibrations

About Analytic Functions

z = x + iy is analytic
n
z is analytic if n is an integer

αz
e is analytic

if f 1 and f 2 are each analytic, then so are

α f 1, f 1 + f 2, f 1 f 2 , f 1 ⁄ f 2

if f is analytic, then so is f '


if Re ( f ) is constant then Im ( f ) is also constant.
if Im ( f ) is constant then Re ( f ) is also constant.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture2.frm
Slides of Lecture 3

Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class

• Homework

• Fourier Analysis and the Complex Operators

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Homework Number 2
Advanced Vibrations

Part A. Determine the impulse response function h ( t ) for System A.


Assume that the system is under-damped ( ζ < 1 ).
Part B. Determine the indicial response function g ( t ) for System A.

System A
K
M
c

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution to Homework 2
Part A
Advanced Vibrations

The impulse response function satisfies

t
u(t ) = ∫ h ( t – τ )F ( τ ) dτ .
0

1 –1  1 
By Laplace Transforms, h ( t ) = -
----  ---------------------------------------
-
M  s + 2ζω n s + ω n
2 2

Our task is to invert this laplace transform.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution to Homework 2
Part A
Advanced Vibrations

2 2
We begin by noting that s + 2ζω n s + ω n = ( s – r 1 ) ( s – r 2 )

2 2
where r 1 = – ζω n + iω n 1 – ζ and r 2 = – ζω n – i ω n 1 – ζ
Note further that these are complex conjugates. This is no surprise
since the roots of a polynomial of real coefficients are combinations of
real numbers and complex conjugate pairs.
We now expand as partial fractions
1 1 A B
---------------------------------------
- = --------------------------------------
- = -----------------
- + --------------------
-
2
s + 2ζω n s + ω n
2 ( s – r 1 ) ( s – r 1∗ ) ( s – r 1 ) ( s – r 1∗ )

We solve for A and B : 1 = A ( s – r 1∗ ) + B ( s – r 1 ) to find

A = 1 ⁄ 2iIm ( r 1 ) and B = – 1 ⁄ 2iIm ( r 1 )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution to Homework 2
Part A
Advanced Vibrations

1 –1  1 
h ( t ) = -----  ---------------------------------------
-
M  s + 2ζω n s + ω n
2 2

1 –1  1 1 
= ---------------------------
M2iIm ( r 1 )  ------------
- – ---------------- 
î s – r 1 s – r 1∗ 
1  r 1 t r 1∗ t 
= ---------------------------  e – e 
M2iIm ( r 1 ) î 
Re { r 1 }t
e  iIm { r 1 }t iIm { r 1∗ }t 
= ---------------------------  e –e 
M2iIm ( r 1 ) î 
– ω n ζt
e 2
= ------------------------------- sin ( ω n 1 – ζ t )
2
Mω n 1 – ζ
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/7/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Partial Solution to Homework 2
Part B
Advanced Vibrations

Here we begin by recalling that


t
u(t ) = ∫ g ( t – τ )Ḟ ( τ ) dτ + F ( 0 )g ( t )
0
By taking the Laplace transform:

{ u } = { g } ( s { F } – F ( 0 ) ) + { g }F ( 0 )
= s {g} {F }

but we recall that {u} = {h} {F },

and we conclude that {g} = {h} ⁄ s

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Partial Solution to Homework 2
Part B
Advanced Vibrations

For this problem,


1 1 1 1 1 
{g} = --
- {h} = --------------------------- --
-  ------------- – ---------------- 
s M2iIm ( r 1 ) s î s – r 1 s – r 1∗ 

We expand this into partial fractions (yuck):

1 1 1  1 ⁄ r 1 1 ⁄ r 1 1 ⁄ r 1∗ 1 ⁄ r 1∗
---  ------------- – ----------------  = – ----------- + ------------- + -------------- – ----------------
s î s – r 1 s – r 1∗  s s – r1 s s – r 1∗

It is up to the students to complete the assignment.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution to Homework 3
Part A
Advanced Vibrations

Part A. Resolve out the degree of freedom u1 associated with the mass
in System B to in favor of u2. Obtain a governing equation in a single
degree of freedom u2. You may leave this in Laplace transform space.

Part B. Determining the impulse response function for this problem.


This function lives in the time domain. Assume that the system is
under-damped.
System B u1 u2
K

c M
K2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution to Homework 3
Part A
Advanced Vibrations

Mu̇˙1 + cu̇ 1 + K u 1 = K 2 ( u 2 – u 1 )
System B u1 u2
K
M
c K2 F = K 2 ( u2 – u1 )

Lets rewrite the first equation as Mu̇˙1 + cu̇ 1 + K u 1 = F which is


solved by Laplace transform:

{F }
{ u 1 } = -----------------------------------------------
2 2
- so u 1 = h 1 *F
M ( s + 2ζω n + ω n )
– ω n ζt
e 2
where h 1 ( t ) = ------------------------------- sin ( ω n 1 – ζ t )
2
Mω n 1 – ζ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution to Homework 3
Part A
Advanced Vibrations

System B u1 u2
K
Mu̇˙1 + cu̇ 1 + K u 1 = F
M
c K2 F = K 2 ( u2 – u1 )

We solve the second equation for u2 :

F
u 2 = ------ + u 1
K2
F 1
= ------ + h 1 *F ⇒ h 2 = h 1 + ------ δ
K2 K2
=  h 1 + ------ δ *F
1
 K2 

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Concepts from Complex Variable Analysis
A Reminder
Advanced Vibrations

General Notions

Complex number z = x + iy
Real and Imaginary operators: Re { x + iy } = x , Im { x + iy } = y
Complex Conjugate: ( x + iy )∗ = x – iy
1 1
Observe: Re { z } = ( z + z ) and Im { z } = - ( z – z∗ )
--
- ∗ ----
2 2i
Complex Function of a Complex Variable: f ( z ) = u ( z ) + iv ( z )
An Analytic Function has a Unique Derivative:

∂f ∂f ∂u ∂v ∂v ∂u
= ⇒ = and = –
∂x ∂ ( iy ) ∂ x ∂y ∂x ∂y

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Concepts from Complex Variable Analysis
A Reminder
Advanced Vibrations

Examples of Analytic Functions

z = x + iy is analytic
n
z is analytic if n is an integer

αz
e , sin ( αz ) and cos ( αz ) are analytic

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Identifying Analytic Functions,
Some Useful Rules
Advanced Vibrations

if f 1 and f 2 are each analytic, then so are

α f 1, f 1 + f 2, f 1 f 2 , f 1 ⁄ f 2

if f is analytic, then so is f '


if Re ( f ) is constant then Im ( f ) is also constant.
if Im ( f ) is constant then Re ( f ) is also constant.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Analytic Functions,
Some More Useful Rules
Advanced Vibrations

The Re{ } operator distributes over addition: (trivially.)


Re { A + B } = Re { A } + Re { B }

If f ( α ) is a complex function of a real parameter, α , then the Re and


derivative operator commute: (a little harder to see.)

d d f 
Re { f ( α ) } = Re  
dα î dα 

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Analytic Functions,
Some More Useful Rules
Advanced Vibrations

The integral over a cycle of two harmonic functions: (more difficult)

ω
ω ------
1
------ ∫ Re { Ae }Re { Be } dt = --- Re { AB∗ }
2π iωt iωt
2π 0 2
1
= --- [ Re { A }Re { B } + Im { A }Im { B } ]
2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Analytic Functions,
Some More Useful Rules
Advanced Vibrations

When you have the trick to prove the above, you can show the
following:

ω ∞ ∞
ω 0 2π-
-----  iω 0 pt   iω 0 qt 
------ ∫ Re  ∑ A p e Re  ∑ B q e dt
2π 0 î p=0  î q=0 

1

= Re { A 0 B 0 } + ---
2 ∑ Re { Aq Bq∗ }
q=1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
About Real (Actual) Forces
and Displacements
Advanced Vibrations

Forces and displacements are real. They may be scalar, vector, or


algebraic, but they are not complex. On the other hand, we sometimes
define complex quantities to represent, indirectly, periodic forces:

iωt
f ( t ) = Fe in NOT a force

The following could be forces:

iωt iωt – i ωt – i ωt
Re { Fe } , Im { Fe } , Re { Fe } , Im { Fe }
– i ωt
+ F∗ e
iωt
or Fe
This last form will be especially useful when we deal with complex
modes.

In the above, F could be a complex scalar, a complex vector, an array of


complex scalars, or an array of complex vectors. We will consider the
more complicated cases later in this course.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Application to Damped Harmonic Oscillator
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the simple, single-degree-of-freedom oscillator shown below:


c

m Pcos(ωt+θ)

k
x(t)

The equation of motion for the mass is:

mẋ˙ + cẋ + kx = P cos ( ωt + θ ) which we can express in


exponential form by

iωt
P cos ( ωt + θ ) = Re { Fe }
where Re { F 1 } = P cos ( θ ) and Im { F 1 } = P sin ( θ ) .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution in Frequency Space
Advanced Vibrations

Lets postulate that the steady state displacement has the same form:

iωt
u ( t ) = Re { X e }
In order to evaluate the time derivatives of x , we must observe that the
Re{ } and derivative operators commute:

d iωt  d iωt  iωt


ẋ ( t ) = Re { X e } = Re  X e  = Re { iωX e }
dt î dt 
2 iωt
and similarly, ẋ˙( t ) = Re { – ω X e }

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Substituting back into the
equation of motion:
Advanced Vibrations

2 iωt iωt
mRe { – ω X e } + cRe { iωX e }
iωt iωt
+ kRe { X e } – R e { Fe } = 0

We observe that the Re operator distributes over addition:


2 iωt
Re { [ ( – ω m + iωc + k )X – F ]e } = 0

There are several easy ways to prove that the complex argument of the
iωt
Re operator in the above equation is zero. Then the coefficient of e
is also zero:

2
[ ( – ω m + iωc + k )X – F ] = 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

Solving for X ( ω ) from which we find that

F
X = --------------------------------------------
2
-
( – ω m + iωc + k )
F⁄k F
- = --- H ( ω )
= ----------------------------------------------------------------
2
1 – ( ω ⁄ ω n ) + 2iζ ( ω ⁄ ω n ) k

2
where ω n = k ⁄ m and ζ = c ⁄ ( 2m ) . H ( ω ) is the magnification
factor.

The text discusses the magnification factor, its magnitude, where the
magnitude is largest, and the role of damping - ζ - in calculating Q

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Limiting Cases
Advanced Vibrations

Let’s examine limiting cases:

ω ⁄ ω n → 0 ⇒ F = kx : this is statics, force is in phase with


displacement

2
ω ⁄ ω n → ∞ ⇒ F = – x mω : mass loading is opposite to
displacement

2
1 1–ζ
ω = ω n ⇒ x = --- 1 – i ------------------ F :
2 ζ

For small damping, F = 2ζiX

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Products and Integrals
Advanced Vibrations

The importance of the rigor introduced above is illustrated in the


calculation of the time-averaged rate of energy dissipation.

1 T
D = --- ∫ ẋ ( τ ) f ( τ ) dτ
T 0
1 T  F iωτ 
= --- ∫ Re  iω --- H e Re { Fe } dτ
iωτ
T 0 î k 
ω 2
= – ------ Im ( H ) F
2k

where T = 2π ⁄ ω .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Fourier Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

System A We again consider the damped linear


oscillator. This time we consider an
K F(t) applied force
M ∞
c
 ipω 0 t 
F ( t ) = Re  C pe ∑ 
î p=0 
(The “Re” operator was neglected in equations 1.86, 1.87of the text.)
We deduce the coefficients of the Fourier series from integration
against the basis functions:

2π ⁄ ω 0 2π ⁄ ω 0
ω0 ω0 – iω 0 q
C 0 = ------
2π ∫ F ( t ) dt ,and C q = ------
π ∫ F ( t )e dt for 0<q
0 0
Please verify this yourselves!

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Response of the System
Advanced Vibrations

Exploiting linearity and our previous analysis of damped linear


systems,


 ipω 0 t 
x ( t ) = Re  ∑ ( C p ⁄ k )H ( ω p )e 
î p=0 

1
where H ( ω ) = ---------------------------------------------------------------------
2
-
[ 1 – ( ω ⁄ ω n ) ] + i2ζ ( ω ⁄ ω n )
This is the key result of Fourier Analysis.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Let’s Calculate some Averages
The Easy Way: Re-Examine Page 16
Advanced Vibrations

Lets calculate the square of RMS force:


2
F =
ω ∞ ∞
ω 0 2π-
-----  iω 0 pt   iω 0 qt 
------ ∫ Re  ∑ C p e Re  ∑ C q e dt
2π 0 î p=0  î q=0 


2 1
= C 0 + ---
2 ∑ C q C q∗
q=0

1

2 2
= C0 + --- Cq
2
q=0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
26 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Let’s Calculate some Averages
The Easy Way: Re-Examine Page 16
Advanced Vibrations

Lets calculate the square of RMS displacement:


2
x =
ω ∞ ∞
ω 0 2π-
-----  Cp iω 0 pt   Cq iω 0 qt 
------ ∫ Re  ∑ ------ H ( ω p )e  Re  ∑ ------ H ( ω q )e  dt
2π 0 î p=0 k  î k 
q=0

2 ∞
C
=  ------ + -------2-
1
∑ C q C q∗ H ( ωq )H ( ωq )∗
0
 k
2k q=0
2 ∞
 C  1

0 2 2
= ------ + -------2- C q H ( ωq )
 k
2k q=0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
27 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Let’s Calculate some Averages
The Easy Way: Re-Examine Page 16
Advanced Vibrations

Lets calculate the square of RMS dissipation rate:

F ẋ =
ω ∞ ∞
ω 0 2π- 
----- iω 0 pt   Cq iω 0 qt 
------ ∫ Re 
2π 0 ∑ C pe Re  ∑ iω 0 q -----
k
- H ( ω q )e  dt
î p=0  î q=1 

∑ C q C q∗ Im { H ( ωq ) }
1
= – ------
2k
q=0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98
28 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture3.frm
Slides of Lecture 4

Advanced Vibrations

Review of Topics of Students’ Choice

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture4.frm
Slides of Lecture 5
(Presented over two periods)
Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class: Energy Methods

• Lagrange Equations

• Hamilton’s Principle
There are two energy methods we shall cover in this class. Together
they can form the basis of deriving governing equations and discretized
governing equations for almost any system we encounter
In this class and next, we shall derive the Lagrange equations and
practice applying them. After that we shall examine Hamilton’s
principle.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Theme
Advanced Vibrations

Up to now We have assembled the governing equations multi-body


systems using:
• force balance

• displacement continuity

• perspicacity

We had to be smart.

Lagrange Equations Provide a Recipe


We do not have to be so smart.
We have broader choice of degrees of freedom - called generalized
coordinates.
We can accommodate constraints, implicitly or explicitly.
Certain invariance properties hold (explained later).

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

Newton’s Law of Motion for a Particle:


F = p
∂t

where p is linear momentum.


Assuming constant mass and in the special case of a orthogonal
Cartesian coordinate system,

3
∂ ∂
F =
∂t
p = mv = m
∂t ∑ ẋ˙n bn =
n=1

where b n are unit basis vector that are constant in time and space. This
permits us to write a simple expression involving the components:

F n = mẋ˙n
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

The big lesson here is that


∂ ˙
F = mx => F n = mẋ˙n
∂t
for orthogonal, Cartesian coordinate systems

What about other coordinate systems?

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

Consider a particle whose position, g,


is expressed in terms of a polar
coordinate system: g = re r ( θ ) g
where the basis vectors e r ( θ ) and eθ ( θ )
er ( θ ) r
e θ ( θ ) are related to the standard θ
orthogonal cartesian coordinate

system by: e r ( θ ) = cos ( θ )i + sin ( θ ) j and


e θ ( θ ) = – sin ( θ ) i + cos ( θ ) j

The particle moves, so the coordinates r and θ of the particle are


functions of time: r = r ( t ) and θ = θ ( t ) .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

A little arithmetic shows that

∂ ∂
e r ( θ ) = θ̇e θ ( θ ) and that e θ ( θ ) = – θ̇e r ( θ )
∂t ∂t

Recalling that g = re r ( θ ) we derive


˙ ˙˙ 2
g = ṙe r + rθ̇e θ and g = ( ṙ˙ – rθ̇ )e r + 2ṙθ̇e θ

Expressing any imposed force in this systems as F = F r er + F θ eθ


we find that Newton’s Law gives us

2
F r = ṙ˙ – rθ̇ and F θ = 2ṙθ̇

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

2
What do we observe from F r = ṙ˙ – rθ̇ and F θ = 2ṙθ̇ ?
• Because this is not an orthogonal Cartesian coordinate system:
F r ≠ ṙ˙ and F θ ≠ θ̇˙
• The form of the scalar equations of motion depends on the
coordinate system used

• We had to be smart to deduce the equations of motion

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

Lets find a method that does not require us to be so smart. One such
method is the use of Lagrange Equations.
• The derivation shown here is not that of the text, but it is the more
standard approach.

• Students are not responsible for reproducing this derivation, but


you will see it again in your studies of applied mechanics. It
would be good to be able to follow the derivation.

• The derivation shown here is for systems of particles. The


extension to systems of rigid bodies and of continua will be
accepted on faith.

• The way to get comfortable with Lagrange equations is through


practice.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

We consider a system of N particles and set of n generalized


coordinates { q k } . It is assumed that these coordinates:
• are enough to describe the configuration of the system of
particles completely at any time, i.e.

x k ( t ) = f k ( q 1, q 2, …q n, t )

 ∂ 
• are independent, i.e. Rank  f k = n
î ∂ ql 
• are appropriately differentiable

∂x k ∂
(We sometimes simplify the notation: = f k. )
∂ qr ∂ qr

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

We differentiate our kinematic relations to derive an expression for


particle velocity:

˙
 ∂ f  q̇ + ∂ f
xk ( t ) = ∑  ∂ qr k r ∂ t k
r

The rates q̇ r are sometimes called speeds. Note that

∂ ˙ ∂ ∂ ˙ ∂
xk = f k , so we conclude that xk ( t ) = x k . We shall
∂ q̇ r ∂ qr ∂ q̇ r ∂ qr
use this later.
With our expression for particle velocity we can construct kinetic
energy in terms of the generalized degrees of freedom.

1
T = --- ∑ m k  ∂ x  q̇ + ∂ x ⋅  ∂ x  q̇ + ∂ x
2 k ∑  ∂ qr k r ∂ t k ∑  ∂ qs k s ∂ t k
r s
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline
for Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

The partial derivative of kinetic energy on speed is called the


generalized momentum:

∂T  ˙ ∂ ˙
pr =
∂ q̇ r
= ∑ mk  xk ⋅ ∂ q̇r xk .
k
Because Newton’s equations involve the rate of change of momentum,
we are motivated to take the following time derivative:

dp r d ∂T  ˙˙ ∂x˙k  
˙ d ∂x k
˙
=   = ∑ k  k ∂ q̇r ∑ k k ⋅ d t  ∂ q̇r
m x ⋅ + m x .
dt d t  ∂ q̇ r k k

We shall simplify each of the summations on the right hand side of the
above equation.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

 ˙˙ ∂x˙k 
Simplifying ∑ m k  x k ⋅ 
k  ∂ q̇ r

˙
∂x k ∂x k
Recalling that = ,
∂ q̇ r ∂ qr

 ˙˙ ∂x˙k   ˙˙ ∂x k  ∂x k
∑ mk  xk ⋅ ∂ q̇r =  ∑ mk xk ⋅ ∂ qr = ∑ F k ⋅ ∂ qr = F r
k k k

Fr is called the Generalized Force associated with the generalized


coordinate qr .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

˙
˙ d  ∂x k  ˙ d  ∂x k 
Simplifying ∑ m k x k ⋅   = ∑ mk xk ⋅ ,
d t  ∂ q̇ r 
d t ∂ qr
k k

We note that the derivative in the summation is:


2 2
d  ∂x k  ∂ xk ∂ xk

d t ∂ qr 
=
∂ q r ∂q s∑q̇ s + ∑
∂ q r ∂t
s s
∂ ∂x k ∂x k ∂
=
∂ qr ∑ ∂ qs s ∑ ∂ t
q̇ + =
∂ qr
xk and obtain
s s

˙ d  ∂x k  ˙ ∂ ˙
∑ mk xk ⋅ d t  ∂ qr = ∑ mk xk ⋅
∂ qr
xk
k k
∂ mk ˙ ˙ ∂T
= ∑
∂ qr k
-----
2
- [ xk ⋅ xk ] =
∂ qr
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations: Derivation Outline for
Systems of Particles
Advanced Vibrations

dp r ∂T
We combine all the above to find that = Fr + .
dt ∂ qr

d  ∂T  ∂T
The more common form of this is – = Fr
 
d t ∂ q̇ r ∂ q r
The above are Lagrange’s equations.
• They hold in any system of coordinates.

• They reduce down to the component form of Newton’s Law for


orthogonal, Cartesian system.

• They are an invariant recipe.

• They accommodate constraints. This is shown later.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations:
First Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the pendulum shown, consisting of a mass


suspended by a massless rod. The only degree of y
freedom is θ . Lets proceed with the steps of the O x
recipe.
1. Express configuration in terms of the generalized
θ Tension T
coordinates: x = R sin ( θ )i – R cos θ j
R
2. Evaluate the Jacobian. These terms are really

important. x = R cos θi + R sin θ j
∂θ m
mg
3. Write the applied forces: F = – mg j – T ( x ⁄ x )

4. Calculate generalized forces: Fr = F ⋅ x = – mgR sin θ .
∂θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations:
First Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

5. Calculate kinetic energy:


m ˙ ˙ m ∂ ∂  2 m 2 2
T = ---- ( x ⋅ x ) = ---- x ⋅ x θ̇ = ---- R θ̇
2 2 ∂θ ∂θ 
 2

d  ∂T  2
6. Plug and Chug = mR θ̇˙ = – mgR sin θ
d t  ∂ θ̇

Observe
• We did not have to make any smart observations to evaluate the
governing equation

• The tension on the rod did not play any role in the equation for θ̇˙ .
This is because forces of constraint do not act in the directions of
motion, so they do no work. We shall see this some more later.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Degrees of Freedom and Constraints:
Several Approaches
Advanced Vibrations

1. Because we have freedom in choosing our generalized degrees of


freedom, we can exploit the constraints to minimize the number of
degrees of freedom.
2. Where our constraints are holonomic (of the sort
h ( q 1, q 2, …q n ) = 0 ) we can use the constraints to resolve out
extra degrees of freedom before calculating kinetic energy or
generalized forces.

We shall practice these later.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Degrees of Freedom
Potential Energies
Advanced Vibrations

Sometimes, we can simplify the calculations of


generalized forces when they derive from a potential
energy. At the moment, we can identify several sorts
of force:
conservative external force - such as gravity
conservative internal force - such as strain energy
non-conservative external force - generally the case
non-conservative internal force - damping elements

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Degrees of Freedom
Potential Energies
Advanced Vibrations

Potential energies give rise to conservative forces. The forces depend


only on current configuration and can be written in terms of gradients
of the corresponding potential energy.


F = –∇ V = – V
∂x
Note the nice feature of the chain rule for conservative forces:

∂ ∂V ∂ ∂V
Fr = F ⋅ x = – ⋅ x = –
∂ qr ∂ x ∂ qr ∂ qr
This facilitates the formulation of the equations.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lagrange Equations:
First Example Problem Revisited
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the pendulum shown, consisting of a mass y


suspended by a massless rod. The only degree of O x
freedom is θ . Lets proceed with the steps of the
receipt.
1. Again, express the configuration in terms of θ Tension T
generalized coordinates:
R
x = R sin ( θ )i – R cos θ j

2. Evaluate the Jacobian. x = R cos θi + R sin θ j m mg
∂θ

3. There are only conservative forces F = – ∇(mgy)


from which we deduce
∂ ∂
Fθ = – mgy = – ( – mgR cos θ ) = – mgR sin θ
∂θ ∂θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

4. Calculate kinetic energy:


m ˙ ˙ m ∂ ∂  2 m 2 2
T = ---- ( x ⋅ x ) = ---- x ⋅ x θ̇ = ---- R θ̇
2 2 ∂θ ∂θ 
 2

d  ∂T  2
5. Plug and Chug = mR θ̇˙ = – mgR sin θ
d t  ∂ θ̇

Note that by using the potential energy, we were able to ignore


irrelevant forces (the tension in the rod).

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Another Example
Consider the following system involving both
spring tension and gravity. y
1. Again, the location of the mass is expressed in O x
terms of the generalized coordinate θ ,
R
x = R sin ( θ )i – R cos θ j k
2. Evaluate the Jacobian
m
3. The generalized forces are calculated. This
time we only need to consider potential
2
energies: V = mgy + k y ⁄ 2 .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

We use our recipe for generalized force:


∂V ∂ 2 2
Fθ = – = – [ – m gR cos θ + kR cos θ ⁄ 2 ]
∂θ ∂θ
2
= – mgR sin ( θ ) + kR sin ( 2θ ) ⁄ 2

2 2
4. Again, the kinetic energy is T = m ( R θ̇ ) ⁄ 2
2 2
5. Plug and chug: mR θ̇˙ = – mgR sin θ + kR sin ( 2θ ) ⁄ 2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lets do and EASY one
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the following system involving both a


torsional spring tension and gravity.
K
1. Again, the location of the mass is expressed
R
in terms of the generalized coordinate θ ,
θ
x = R sin ( θ )i – R cos θ j . m
2. Evaluate the Jacobian
3. The generalized forces are calculated. This
time we only need to consider potential
2
energies to do this: V = mgy + K θ ⁄ 2 .
We use our recipe for generalized force:
∂V ∂ 2
Fθ = – = – [ – m gR cos θ + K θ ⁄ 2 ]
∂θ ∂θ
= – mgR sin ( θ ) – K θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

2 2
4. Again, the kinetic energy is T = m ( R θ̇ ) ⁄ 2
2
5. Plug and chug: mR θ̇˙ = – mgR sin θ – K θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Lets Do One with Damping


Here we consider a another simple problem. It
contains both conservative and dissipative forces:
K
1. Again, the location of the mass is expressed in
terms of the generalized coordinate θ ,
R
x = R sin ( θ )i – R cos θ j θ
2. Evaluate the Jacobian. m
3. The generalized forces are calculated. This time µ
we to consider potential energy as well as a
force due to viscous damping and add the
C D
forces: F θ = F θ + F θ . As before, the force
due to the potential energy V = mgy is

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
26 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

C ∂V ∂
Fθ = – = – [ – m gR cos θ ]
∂θ ∂θ
= – mgR sin ( θ ) .
The force due to damping must be calculated in the brute force manner:
D D ∂ ∂
F θ = F ⋅ x = – µẋi ⋅ x
∂θ ∂θ
= – ( µθ̇R [ cos θi ] ⋅ R [ cos θi + sin θ j ] )
2 2
= – µθ̇R cos θ

2 2
4. Again, the kinetic energy is T = m ( R θ̇ ) ⁄ 2
2 2 2
5. Plug and chug: mR θ̇˙ = – mgR sin θ – µθ̇R cos θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
27 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
That Was Hard
Advanced Vibrations

There must be an easier way to handle viscous


dissipation. That will be covered in the next lesson.
We shall address more of these dissipative problems
then.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
28 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Some Easy Conservative Problems
The simplest problem
Advanced Vibrations

The potential energy is trivially found:


1 2 k
V = --- ku . The generalized force is
2
∂V
Fu = – = – ku . u
∂u
m 2
The kinetic energy is just as easily found: T = ---- u̇ , so
2
d  ∂T  ∂T
– = mu̇˙ = – ku

d t ∂ u̇  ∂u

That was easy. Lets do another.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
29 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Some Easy Non-Conservative Problems
The simplest problem with a force.
Advanced Vibrations

The potential energy is trivially found:


1 2 k Fe(t)
V = --- ku . The generalized force is
2
∂V
Fu = – + F e = – ku + F e ( t ) . u
∂u
m 2
The kinetic energy is just as easily found: T = ---- u̇ , so
2
d  ∂T  ∂T
– = mu̇˙ = – ku + F e ( t )

d t ∂ u̇  ∂u

That was not so difficult. Lets do another just slightly more difficult.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
30 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Some Easy Non-Conservative Problems
A still-simple problem.
Advanced Vibrations

k1 m1 k m2
2

u1 u2

1 2 1 2
The potential energy is easily found: V = --- k 1 u 1 + --- k 2 ( u 2 – u 1 ) .
2 2
The generalized forces are

∂V
F u1 = – = –k 1 u1 –k 2 ( u1 – u2 ) and
∂ u1

∂V
F u2 = – = –k 2 ( u2 – u1 ) .
∂ u2
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
31 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

m1 2 m2 2
The kinetic energy is just as easily found: T = ------ u̇ 1 + ------ u̇ 2 , so
2 2
d  ∂T  ∂T
– = m 1 u̇˙1 = – k 1 u 1 – k 2 ( u 1 – u 2 ) and
 
d t ∂ u̇ 1 ∂ u 1

d  ∂T  ∂T
– = m 2 u̇˙2 = – k 2 ( u 2 – u 1 )
 
d t ∂ u̇ 2 ∂ u 2

m1 u̇˙1 k 1 + k 2 –k 2 u1
In matrix form, + = 0
m 2 u̇˙2 –k 2 k2 u2 0
Thus are developed mass and stiffness matrices
Lets do it again.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
32 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Some Easy Non-Conservative Problems
A still-simple problem.
Advanced Vibrations

k1 m1 k m2
2

u1 u2
k3

The potential energy is


easily found:
1 2 1 2 2
V = --- k 1 u 1 + --- k 2 ( u 2 – u 1 ) + k 3 u 2 . The generalized forces
2 2
∂V
are F u = – = – k 1 u 1 – k 2 ( u 1 – u 2 ) and
1 ∂ u1
∂V
F u2 = – = –k 2 ( u2 – u1 ) – k 3 u2 .
∂ u2
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
33 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

m1 2 m2 2
The kinetic energy is just as still: T = ------ u̇ 1 + ------ u̇ 2 , so
2 2
d  ∂T  ∂T
– = m 1 u̇˙1 = – k 1 u 1 – k 2 ( u 1 – u 2 ) and
 
d t ∂ u̇ 1 ∂ u 1

d  ∂T  ∂T
– = m 2 u̇˙2 = – k 2 ( u 2 – u 1 ) – k 3 u 2
 
d t ∂ u̇ 2 ∂ u 2

m1 u̇˙1 k1 + k2 –k 2 u1
In matrix form, + = 0
m 2 u̇˙2 –k 2 k 2 + k 3 u2 0
This is still easy.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
34 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lets do a funny one
Advanced Vibrations

m1 k m2 m3
1 k2

The potential energy is u1 u2 u3


again easily found:

1 2 1 2
V = --- k 1 ( u 2 – u 1 ) + --- k 2 ( u 3 – u 2 ) . The generalized forces are:
2 2

∂V
F u1 = – = –k 1 ( u1 – u2 )
∂ u1
∂V
F u2 = – = –k 1 ( u2 – u1 ) – k 2 ( u2 – u3 )
∂ u2
∂V
F u3 = – = –k 2 ( u3 – u2 )
∂ u3
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
35 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Advanced Vibrations

m1 2 m2 2 m3 2
The kinetic energy is: T = ------ u̇ 1 + ------ u̇ 2 + ------ u̇ 3 .
2 2 2
The Lagrange equations now give the matrix form

m1 u̇˙1 k1 –k 1 u1 0
m2 u̇˙2 + – k 1 k 1 + k 2 – k 2 u 2 = 0
m3 –k 2 k2 u3 0

This is still easy.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
36 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
About Mass and Stiffness Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

What can we conclude from our limited experience?


• the mass matrix is symmetric

• the mass matrix is nonsingular (so long as each d.o.f. has mass)

• the mass matrix is positive definite

• the stiffness matrix is symmetric

• the stiffness is positive, semi-definite (rigid body motions).

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
37 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
A Summary of the Recipe
Advanced Vibrations

1. Express the cartesian coordinates in terms of the generalized d.o.f.s


2. Calculate the partial derivatives of position w.r.t. generalized d.o.f.s
3. Express the potential energies in terms of the generalized d.o.f.s
4. Evaluate the generalized forces in terms of the generalized d.o.f.s
5. Evaluate the kinetic energy in terms of the generalized d.o.f.s

d  ∂T  ∂T
6. Substitute into the famous – = Fr
 
d t ∂ q̇ r ∂ q r

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
38 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lecture 5, Homework 1
Advanced Vibrations

k
R

The disk shown has radius R, mass m, and mass moment of inertia J.
The disk rolls without slipping and is restrained by a spring of stiffness
k. Use the method of Lagarange’s equations to derive an equation of
motion for the displacment, u, of the center of gravity of the disk.

Hint: Rθ̇ = u̇ .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
39 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Lecture 5, Homework 2
Advanced Vibrations

Derive the equations of motion for the following 2-d.o.f. problem:

m1
u

θ
L

m2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
40 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

We shall compare solution to homework 2B.


We shall go over today’s problems again.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
41 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
The Time after Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

Small Displacements and Linearization


Dissipation Potential
More on Mass and Stiffness Matrices

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
42 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture5.frm
Slides of Lecture 6

Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class:

• Solution to Homework 1 of Lecture 5.

• Short Quiz

• Comparison of answers to Homework 2B

• Practice with Lagrange Equations

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Lecture 5, Homework 1
Advanced Vibrations

k
R

The disk shown has radius R, mass m, and mass moment of inertia J.
The disk rolls without slipping and is restrained by a spring of stiffness
k. Use the method of Lagrange’s equations to derive an equation of
motion for the displacement, u, of the center of gravity of the disk.

Hint: Rθ̇ = u̇ .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Lecture 5, Homework 1: Solution
Advanced Vibrations

1 2 1 2
Kinetic Energy: T = --- mu̇ + --- J θ̇
2 2

Substituting Rθ̇ = u̇ into the expression for kinetic energy and


performing the appropriate derivatives:

d  ∂T  2
= ( m + J ⁄ R )u̇˙
d t  ∂ u

1 2 ∂V
Potential Energy: V = --- ku yields force: F u = – = – ku
2 ∂u

∂V
The potential energy yields a force Fu = – = – ku
∂u
2
Putting it all together: ( m + J ⁄ R )u̇˙ + ku = 0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Short Quiz:
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the problem of an inverted


pendulum. Derive the equation of x = R ( sin θi + cos θ j )
motion of this structure in terms of the
angle θ. m

Note that the torsional spring serves to R


restore (center) the pendulum but that
gravity serves to exacerbate any θ
displacement from center.

Remember to write T = … and


V = … κ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Resolution of Homework 2B
Advanced Vibrations

Determine the indicial response System 1


function g ( t ) for System 1. Recall that K
the indicial response function satisfies M
c
t
u(t ) = ∫ g ( t – τ )Ḟ ( τ ) dτ + F ( 0 )g ( t )
0
We take the Laplace transform to
find Lu = ( Lg ) ( sLF – F ( 0 ) ) + ( Lg )F ( 0 ) = ( Lg ) ( sLF )
Recall that the step response satisfies Lu = ( Lh ) ( LF ) from which
we conclude that Lg = ( Lh ) ⁄ s and that
t
g(t ) = ∫ h ( τ ) dτ
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Advanced Vibrations

From an earlier homework, we found

1 –1  1 
h ( t ) = -----  ---------------------------------------
-
M  s + 2ζω n s + ω n
2 2

– ω n ζt
e 2
= ------------------------------- sin ( ω n 1 – ζ t )
2
Mω n 1 – ζ

We integrate this to find

t – ω n ζτ
e

2
g(t ) = ------------------------------
- sin ( ω n 1 – ζ τ ) dτ
2
0 Mω n 1 – ζ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Advanced Vibrations

After a little integration, this becomes.

g(t ) =

– ω n ζt  2 ζ 2 
1–e  cos ( ω n 1 – ζ )t + ------------------ sin ( ω n 1 – ζ )t
 1–ζ
2 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
K
Simplifications have included the observations that

2 2 2 2 2
( ω n ζ ) + ( ω n 1 – ζ ) = ω n and that Mω n = K

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Remember to do the second homework
given in Lecture 5.
Advanced Vibrations

Derive the equations of motion for the following 2-d.o.f. problem:

m1
u

θ
L

m2

Express kinematics in terms of generalized degrees of freedom:

x 1 = ui and x 2 = ui + L sin θ i – L cos θ j .

The potential energy is just that due to gravity: V = – m 2 gL cos θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

• Small Displacements and Linearization

• Dissipation Potential

• More on Mass and Stiffness Matrices

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture6.frm
Slides of Lecture 7

Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class:

Conservation of Energy
Small Displacements and Linearization
Dissipation Potential

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Mechanical Energy
Advanced Vibrations

Consider a system composed of N particles. For each of which,

d
mk vk = F k .
dt
We contract each side with the particle velocity and sum over particles:

 dv k
∑ mk  vk ⋅ d t  = ∑ F k ⋅ vk
k k

 dv k d mk
Note that ∑ m k v k ⋅ ∑ d t 2 ( vk ⋅ vk ) = d t
dT
= -----
- and that
 dt 
k k

∑ F k ⋅ vk is the rate at which work is applied to the system.


k

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Mechanical Energy
Advanced Vibrations

Always,

dT d
= ( Work Done to System )
dt dt

But for Conservative Systems,

∂V dx k
∑ k k ∑
dT dV
= F ⋅ v = – ⋅ = –
dt k k ∂x
dt dt
k
from which we conclude that

d
(T + V ) = 0
dt

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Lets Apply Conservation of Energy
To a Simple System.
Advanced Vibrations

A pendulum is released from rest at an angle of θ0 .


Calculate the maximum velocity achieved by the pendulum.

R
T 0 = 0 and V 0 = – mgR cos θ 0 , so
Initially
θ
T 0 + V 0 = – mgR cos θ 0
m
The potential energy is minimized when the pendulum is at
the bottom of its swing. At that point, the kinetic energy
must be at its maximum.

T θ=0 +V θ=0 = T0 + V0 ⇒ T θ=0 = mgR ( 1 – cos θ 0 )

and v max = 2gR ( 1 – cos θ 0 )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Solution to Homework Assigned in
Previous Lecture
Advanced Vibrations

Derive the equations of motion for the following 2-d.o.f. problem:

m1
u

θ
L

m2

Express kinematics in terms of generalized degrees of freedom:

x 1 = ui and x 2 = ui + L sin θ i – L cos θ j .

The potential energy is just that due to gravity: V = – m 2 gL cos θ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Advanced Vibrations

The generalized forces are:

∂V ∂V
Fu = – = 0 and F θ = – = – m 2 gL sin θ .
∂u ∂θ

The kinetic energy is


1 ˙ ˙ 1 ˙ ˙
T = --- m 1 x 1 ⋅ x 1 + --- m 2 x 2 ⋅ x 2
2 2
1 2 1 2 1 2
= --- m 1 u̇ + --- m 2 ( u̇ + Lθ̇ cos θ ) + --- m 2 ( Lθ̇ sin θ )
2 2 2
1 2 1 2 2
= ( m 1 + m 2 )u̇ + m 2 Lθ̇u̇ cos θ + m 2 L θ̇
--
- --
-
2 2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Lets calculate the appropriate partial derivative from this

∂T
= 0 , and
∂u

d  ∂T  d
= [ ( m 1 + m 2 )u̇ + m 2 Lθ̇ cos θ ]
dt  ∂ u̇  dt
2
= ( m 1 + m 2 )u̇˙ – m 2 Lθ̇ sin θ + m 2 Lθ̇˙ cos θ

∂T
= – m 2 Lθ̇u̇ sin θ and
∂θ
d  ∂T  d 2
= [ m 2 ( Lu̇ cos θ + L θ̇ ) ]
d t  ∂ θ̇ dt
= m 2 L ( u̇˙cos θ + Lθ̇˙ – u̇θ̇ sin θ )
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Adding all the Ingredients
Advanced Vibrations

2
( m 1 + m 2 )u̇˙ – m 2 Lθ̇ sin θ + m 2 Lθ̇˙ cos θ = 0
2
and m 2 Lu̇˙cos θ + m 2 L θ̇˙ = – m 2 gL sin θ
These are two messy equations to solve.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Lets Simplify
Advanced Vibrations

0
2
( m 1 + m 2 )u̇˙ – m 2 Lθ̇ sin θ + m 2 Lθ̇˙ cos θ = 0
2
and m 2 Lu̇˙cos θ + m 2 L θ̇˙ = – m 2 gL sin θ

Lets introduce the assumption that θ and θ̇ are each so small that we
can ignore powers and products of them. From this we get the small-
angle formulae:

3 5 2 4
θ θ θ θ
sin θ = θ – ----- + ----- … ≈ θ and cos θ = 1 – ----- + ----- … ≈ 1
3! 5! 2! 4!

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
We now have
Advanced Vibrations

( m 1 + m 2 )u̇˙ – ( m 2 Lθ̇˙ ) = 0 and


2
m 2 Lu̇˙ + m 2 L θ̇˙ = – m 2 gLθ .
In matrix form, this is

m1 + m2 m2 L
u̇˙ + 0 0 u = 0
m2 L m2 L
2
θ̇˙ 0 m 2 gL θ 0

Which is our canonical form for linear the undamped vibration problem

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Steady State Solution
Advanced Vibrations

Lets see what kinds of solution we might get if we postulate steady-

u = Re  û e iωt  . Substituting this


state solutions of the form  
θ î θ̂ 
into the matrix equation, we find

 2 2 
 –ω ( m1 + m2 ) –ω m2 L û iωt 
Re  e  = 0
 2
–ω m2 L – ω m 2 L + m 2 gL θ̂
2 2  0
î 
from which we deduce that

2 2
–ω ( m1 + m2 ) –ω m2 L û
= 0
– ω m 2 L + m 2 gL θ̂
2 2 2 0
–ω m2 L
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Steady State Solution
Advanced Vibrations

2 2
–ω ( m1 + m2 ) –ω m2 L û
The equation = 0 has a
– ω m 2 L + m 2 gL θ̂
2 2 2 0
–ω m2 L
non-trivial solution only if

 2 2 
 – ω ( m 1 + m 2 ) – ω m2 L 
det   = 0
 2
–ω m2 L
2 2
– ω m 2 L + m 2 gL 
î 
2 2
m 2 ω L [ m 1 Lω + ( m 1 + m 2 )g ] = 0
which has two solutions.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Solutions
Advanced Vibrations

2
• Solution 1: ω = 0 . Substituting this into the matrix equation

we see = 1 . This is translation at constant speed.
θ̂ 0

( m 1 + m 2 )g
2
• Solution 2. ω = – ---------------------------- . Substituting this into the
m1 L

1

matrix equation, we find = ( m 1 + m 2 )g . Lets discuss
θ̂ – ----------------------------
m2 L
the significance of this.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Linearization of Vibration Problems.
Perturbation about Static Equilibrium
Advanced Vibrations

Say we have derived our non-linear vibration equations

d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V e ∂x k

e
– + = Fk(t) ⋅ = F r ( { q }, t ) .
 
d t ∂ q̇ r ∂ q r ∂ q r ∂ qr
k
We linearize in the following steps:

s
1. Solve for a stable equilibrium configuration { q } . The system will
be in equilibium if ∂V = 0 for each r and will be in
∂ qr {q} = {q }
s

stable equilibrium if V is at a local minumum.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Perturbation about Static Equilibrium
Advanced Vibrations

s
2. express { q } = { q } + { ∆q } , and substitute into the governing
equation. In this substitution, we use the Taylor series expansion:
∂f
f ( { q } + { ∆q } ) = f ( { q } ) + ∑  
s s
∆q r
 ∂ q r
{q }
s
r

3. delete all products and powers of ∆q r and ∆q̇ r .


4. group terms to form the mass and stiffness matrix.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Lets try this out on some simple problems
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the problem of an inverted


m 2 2 x = R ( sin θi + cos θ j )
pendulum. T = ---- R θ̇ ,
2 m
κ 2
V = --- θ + mgR cos θ , yielding R
2
2 θ
mR θ̇˙ + κθ – mgR sin θ = 0 .
(We have done this before),

Say κ < mgR , then θ = 0 is no


κ
longer a configuration of static
equilibrium. (How do we know? The
negative stiffness is a clue.)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Examine Potential Energy
for different κ ⁄ mgR
Advanced Vibrations

3.8
1.4
8 3.6
3.4
3.2
V/mgR

3 1.2

V/mgR

V/mgR
6 2.8
2.6
2.4 1
2.2
4
2
1.8
0.8
1.6
2 1.4
1.2
1 0.6
–3 –2 –1 0 1 t 2 3 –3 –2 –1 0 1 t 2 3 –3 –2 –1 0 1 t 2 3

θ θ θ
κ =2mgR κ =mgR κ =mgR/2

We see that the location θ = 0 is not a stable equilibrium for


κ < mgR

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Linearization
Advanced Vibrations

s s
1. We now solve for static equilibrium: κθ – mgR sin θ = 0
This may be done numerically:

sin(θ)/θ
κ
-----------
mgR
s
sin θ κ
Solving ------------
s
- = ----------
-
θ mgR

θ
s
From the above plot we may pick off the value of θ that satisfies
the equilibrium equation.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Formulation of Linearized Equations
Advanced Vibrations

s
2. substitute { q } = { q } + { ∆q } into governing equation
2 ˙ s s
mR ∆θ̇ + κ ( θ + ∆θ ) – mgR sin ( θ + ∆θ ) = 0 , and expand
with Taylor series

2 s s s
mR ∆θ̇ + κ ( θ + ∆θ ) – mgR ( sin ( θ ) + cos ( θ )∆θ )
˙
2 ˙ s 0 s s
= mR ∆θ̇ + [ κθ – mgR sin ( θ ) ] + κ∆θ – mgR ( cos ( θ )∆θ )
2 ˙ s
= mR ∆θ̇ + ( κ – mgR cos ( θ ) )∆θ = 0

Note that the equation for static equilibrium appears and is identically
zero.

3. delete all products and powers of ∆q r and ∆q̇ r . Done.


4. group terms to form the mass and stiffness matrix. Done.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
The Compound Pendulum Problem
Lets derive the governing equations
Advanced Vibrations

Kinematics: x 1 = R 1 ( sin θ 1 i – cos θ 1 j ) .


R1
x 2 = R 1 ( sin θ 1 i – cos θ 1 j )
and . θ1
+ R 2 ( sin θ 2 i – cos θ 2 j )

˙
Velocities: x 1 = R 1 θ̇ 1 ( cos θ 1 i + sin θ 1 j ) m1
R2
˙
x 2 = R 1 θ̇ 1 ( cos θ 1 i + sin θ 1 j ) θ2
and
+ R 2 θ̇ 2 ( cos θ 2 i + sin θ 2 j )
m2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Compound Pendulum
Advanced Vibrations

m1 2 m2 2 2
T = ------ ( R 1 θ̇ 1 ) + ------ [ ( R 1 θ̇ 1 ) + ( R 2 θ̇ 2 ) ]
Kinetic Energy: 2 2
+ m 2 ( R 1 θ̇ 1 ) ( R 2 θ̇ 2 ) cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )

Lets do the exercise:

∂T 2
= ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 θ̇ 1 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
∂ θ̇ 1
d  ∂T  2
= ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 θ̇˙1 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙2 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
d t  ∂ θ̇ 1 2
+ m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) – m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
∂T
= m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
∂ θ1
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Compound Pendulum
Advanced Vibrations

∂T 2
= m 2 R 2 θ̇ 2 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 1 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
∂ θ̇ 2
d  ∂T  2
= m 2 R 2 θ̇˙2 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙1 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
d t  ∂ θ̇ 2 2
– m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
∂T
= – m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
∂ θ2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Compound Pendulum
Advanced Vibrations

Potential Energy:
V = m 1 gy 1 + m 2 gy 2 =

= – m 1 gR 1 cos θ 1 – m 2 g [ R 1 cos θ 1 + R 2 cos θ 2 ]

∂V ∂V
= g ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 sin θ 1 and = gm 2 R 2 sin θ 2
∂ θ1 ∂ θ2
Put them all together:

2
( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 θ̇˙1 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙2 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
2
– m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + g ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 sin θ 1 = 0
2
m 2 R 2 θ̇˙2 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙1 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
2
+ m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + gm 2 R 2 sin θ 2 = 0
and
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Homework
Advanced Vibrations

1. The above derivation was done on the


fly. Please check that it is correct. R1

2. Using the methods discussed above, θ1


identify the equilibrium configuration
and linearize the equations of motion
about that configuration.
m1
R2
θ2

m2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Rayleigh Damping
Advanced Vibrations

For the special case of viscous damping,


there exists a dissipation potential that
facilitates the formulation of the equations of
motion. Lets look at the example shown.

Recall that x = R ( sin θi – cos θ j ) The


θ restraining force on the pendulum is found
D
R to be F = – µẋ 1 i = – µRθ̇ cos θi . The
corresponding generalized force associated
with the θ direction is

D D ∂ 2 2
µ
m F θ = F ⋅ x = – µR θ̇ ( cos θ )
∂θ
The governing equation is found to be
2˙ 2
mR θ̇ + Rmg sin θ = – µ ( R cos θ ) θ̇

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Rayleigh Dissipation Potential
Advanced Vibrations

There is another way to calculate the generalized force associated with


the dashpot.

˙D 2
The rate of dissipation in the dashpot is D = F ⋅ x = µẋ 1 . We now
˜D ∂ ∂ µ 2 2
F θ = – (D ⁄ 2) = – (--- ( R cos θ ) θ̇ )
∂ θ̇ ∂ θ̇ 2
2
evaluate = – µ ( R cos θ ) θ̇
˜D D
Notice that F θ = F θ .

Lets discuss why this should not surprise us. Consider virtual work.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
26 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Rayleigh Dissipation Function
Advanced Vibrations

The Rayleigh dissipation function provides a convenient method for


calculating the generalized force associated with dashpots.
The recipe is as follows

1. calculate the rate of dissipation, D , in terms of the speed in


cartesian coordinates.

2. convert that expression to one involving generalized coordinates


and generalized speeds.

3. make the partial with respect to each generalized speed and


multiply by –( 1 ⁄ 2 )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
27 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Rayleigh Dissipation Function
Warning
Advanced Vibrations

Though the Rayleigh dissipation function is easy to use, its uses are
limited.
• Only in a minority of circumstances is the damping associated
with discrete dashpots.

• Usually, damping is associated with a material dissipation. We


will discuss this later if time permits.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
28 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture7.frm
Slides of Lecture 8

Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class:

Review Of Homework From Lecture 7


Hamilton’s Principle
More Examples Of Generalized Coordinates
Calculating Generalized Forces Via Virtual Work

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Homework from Lecture 7
Advanced Vibrations

In the most recent class, we derived the governing


equations for the compound pendulum. The homework R1

assignment was to verify the derivation and to linearize the θ1


resulting equations.
m1
R2
θ2
We found the governing equations to be
m2

2
( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 θ̇˙1 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙2 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
2
– m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + g ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 sin θ 1 = 0
2
m 2 R 2 θ̇˙2 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙1 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
2
+ m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + gm 2 R 2 sin θ 2 = 0
and

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Homework from Lecture 7
Advanced Vibrations

1. Establish the location of stable equilibrium about which to


linearize. By observation, that location is θ1 = θ2 = 0 .
0 0
s s
2. Substitute θ 1 = θ 1 + ∆θ 1 and θ 2 = θ 2 + ∆θ 2 into the
governing equations and expand with Taylor series.

1

( m1 + m 2 )R 1 θ̇ 1 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙2 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
θ2-θ1 θ1
2
– m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + g ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 sin θ 1 = 0
1

m 2 R 2 θ̇ 2 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙1 cos ( θ 2 – θ 1 )
θ2-θ1 θ2
and 2
+ m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 1 sin ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + gm 2 R 2 sin θ 2 = 0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Homework from Lecture 7
Advanced Vibrations

3. Delete all terms involving powers and products of θ 1 , θ 2 , θ̇ 1 , and


θ̇ 2


( m1 + m 2 )R 1 θ̇ 1 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙2

2 0
– m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 2 ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + g ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 θ 1 = 0
and

m 2 R 2 θ̇ 2 + m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙1
2 0
+ m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇ 1 ( θ 2 – θ 1 ) + gm 2 R 2 θ 2 = 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Homework from Lecture 7
Advanced Vibrations

4. Group terms to form the mass and stiffness matrix.

2
( m1 + m 2 )R 1 m 2 R 1 R 2 θ̇˙1 g ( m 1 + m 2 )R 1 0 θ1
+ = 0
m2 R1 R2
2
m2 R2 θ̇˙2 0 gm 2 R 2 θ 2 0

Note that both the mass and stiffness matrices are symmetric and
positive-definite.
The mass equation will be positive so long as we avoid massless
degrees of freedom, that is we always want to choose our degrees of
∂T
freedom so that ≠ 0.
∂ q̇ r
The stiffness matrix will always be non-negative definite. If there are no
rigid-body modes, it will be positive definite. We shall discuss this more
later.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

We consider a mechanical system whose configuration at any time is


characterized by the N generalized coordinates { q } . The system is
A
subject to potential energy V and additional forces { F r } and evolves
over the interval ( t 1, t 2 ) according to the Lagrange equations
d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V A
– + = F r for each r .
 
d t ∂ q̇ r ∂ q r ∂ q r
We can imagine the evolution of
the system configuration over that q3
interval by picturing the motion of q(t2)
a point whose coordinates are
q(t)
{ q ( t ) } in an N-dimensional
Cartesian system. q2
q(t1)
q1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

We contract these scalar equations with test functions η r which are as


yet undetermined except for the conditions η r ( t 1 ) = η r ( t 2 ) = 0 for
each r, and then sum them.

N t2
d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V
∑∫
A
– + – F r η r ( t ) dt = 0
d t  ∂ q̇ r ∂ q r ∂ q r
r = 1 t1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

Integration by parts yields


N t2
∂T ∂V
∑∫
A
– + – Fr η r ( t ) dt
∂ qr ∂ qr
r = 1 t1

N t2
d   ∂T   ∂T
+ ∑∫  
d t ∂ q̇ r
ηr –
 ∂ q̇ r
η̇ r dt = 0
r = 1 t1

Recalling that η r ( t 1 ) = η r ( t 2 ) = 0 , the above integral simplifies

N t2
 ∂T ∂V ∂T 
∑ ∫  – ∂ qr + ∂ qr – F r ηr ( t ) –∂ q̇r η̇r dt = 0
A

r = 1t î 1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

The above is true for all test functions ηr .

η r ( t ) = q̃ r ( t ) – q r ( t ) q3
Let
= δq r ( t ) q(t2)
where { q̃ ( t ) } is another path {q(t)}
from { q ( t 1 ) } to { q ( t 2 ) } “near” ~
{q(t)} q2
the path taken by { q ( t ) } . q(t1)

q1
Our integrals can now be written:

N t2
  ∂T ∂T  ∂V 
∑ ∫  –  ∂ qr δqr + ∂ q̇r δq̇r + ∂ qr – F r δqr dt = 0
A

r = 1t î 1

Observe that the terms involving potential energy are a complete
differential.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

Rearranging the above:


t2 N
   ∂T δq + ∂T δq̇  + – ∂V + F A δq  dt
∫  ∑ î  ∂ q r r ∂ q̇ r r ∂ qr r r

t r=1
1 t2

= ∫ ( δT – δV + δW ) dt = 0
t1

A
Where δW ( t ) = F r ( t ) ( q̃ r ( t ) – q r ( t ) ).
This form of Hamilton’s principle asserts that the actual path is one
t2

about which
∫ ( δT – δV + δW ) dt = 0
t1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Special Case
Advanced Vibrations

A
For the special case where the generalized forces Fr are prescribed
loads, we can define the “Potential Energy of Loading”


A
A = – F r qr
r=1

T
and the “Total Potential Energy” is V = V + A.

In this case, Hamilton’s Principle becomes: The true path in


configuration space of the system makes the quantity
t2


T
J = ( T – V ) dt stationary.
t1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

The strain energy in an Euler-


p(x)
Bernoulli beam is
L 2 2 M0 ML
1 ∂ y 
V = --- ∫ EI  2  dx . The
2
0
∂x  Q0 QL
L
potential energy of loading is

L
A = M 0 ∂y – M L ∂y – Q 0 y ( 0 ) + Q L y ( L ) – ∫ p ( x )y ( x ) dx
∂x 0 ∂x L
0

L
1  ∂y 2
2 ∫
And the Kinetic Energy is T = --- m
 ∂t 
dx where m is the mass
0
per unit length of the beam.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

Lets evaluate the virtual quantities, beginning with Kinetic Energy:


L L
∂ 2 ∂y 2
δT = --- ∫ m ( y + δy ) dx – --- ∫ m   dx
1 1
2 ∂t 2 ∂t 
o 0
L
 ∂y  ∂ 
≅ ∫m δy dx
∂t  ∂t 
0 and

t2 t2 L
  ∂y  ∂  
∫ δT dt = ∫  ∫ m  ∂ t   ∂ t δy dx dt
t1 t 0 2
L t2
 ∂  ∂y  
= ∫ m ∫ δy – ẏ˙δy dt dx
 ∂t ∂t 
 
0 t1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

t2 L 0 t2 L 2
t2 ∂y
∫ δT dt = ∫ m [ ẏδy ] t1 dx – ∫ ∫ m
∂t
2
δy dx dt
t1 0 t1 0

Strain Energy:

L 2 L 2 2
1  ∂  2
1 ∂ y 
δV = --- ∫ EI  2 ( y + δy ) dx – --- ∫ EI  2  dx
2 ∂x 0
 2 ∂x  0
L
 ∂2 
≅ ∫ EI y''  2 δy dx
0
∂x 
L
∂ L
= EI  y'' δy + ∫ EI y δy dx
L IV
– EI ( y'''δy )
 ∂x  0
0
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

The strain energy term becomes:

t2

∫ δV dt =
t1 t2 L
∂ L
∫ EI  y'' δy + ∫ EI y δy dx dt
L IV
– EI ( y'''δy )
 ∂x  0
0
t1 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

In a similar manner, we find the contribution from Potential Energy of


Loading
t2

∫ δA dt
t1 t2
∂ ∂
= ∫ M0
∂x
δy
0
– ML
∂x
δy
L
– Q 0 δy ( 0 ) + Q L δy ( L ) dt
t1
t2 L

–∫ ∫ p ( x )δy dx dt
t1 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

We can group terms.

We start with the terms involving δy ( 0 ) , δy ( L ) ,


∂ ∂
δy 0 , and δy
∂x ∂x L

t2
∂ ∂
∫ M0
∂x
δy 0 – ML ∂x
δy L – Q 0 δy ( 0 ) + Q L δy ( L ) dt
t1
t2
∂ L
+∫ EI  y'' δy
L
– EI ( y'''δy ) dt = 0
 ∂x  0
0
t1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

From which we deduce [ Q 0 – E I y''' ( 0 ) ]δy ( 0 ) = 0 .

A geometric boundary condition specifying y ( 0 ) implies that


δy ( 0 ) = 0 . If displacement is not specified there, then
Q 0 = EI y''' ( 0 ) . This is a “natural” boundary condition.

Similar interpretations are made of [ Q L – E I y''' ( L ) ]δy ( L ) = 0 ,

∂ ∂
[ M 0 – E I y'' ( 0 ) ] δy = 0 and [ M L – E I y'' ( L ) ] δy = 0,
∂x 0 ∂x L

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle: Example
Beam Bending Equation
Advanced Vibrations

Matching terms in the spacial integral we have

t2 L

∫ ∫ [ mẏ˙ + EI y
IV
– p ]δy ( x, t ) dx dt = 0
t1 0

from which we conclude that

IV
mẏ˙ + EI y = p ( x, t )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

Hamilton’s principle is general and always works, though sometimes it


is hard to evaluate.

In particular, note how Hamilton’s Principle is used to derive the partial


differential governing equations.

Also, we saw how to define the potential energy of loading and to use
that with Hamilton’s principle. We will see that we can also use it in with
Lagrange’s equations.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Change of Subject.

The following is an introduction to the method of


ASSUMED MODES.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
More On Generalized Degrees of Freedom
Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider an Euler Bernoulli


beam simply supported at each
end.
Initially, we assume that all
forces are conservative. We
postulate a displacement L
distribution of the sort
2
x(L – x) x (L – x)
y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) -------------------
2
- + A 2 ( t ) ---------------------
3
-
L L
= A1 ( t ) f 1 ( x ) + A2 ( t ) f 2 ( x )

We shall derive Lagrange equations for the evolution of A 1 ( t ) and


A 2 ( t ) . These are our generalized degrees of freedom.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
More On Generalized Degrees of Freedom
Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations

Kinetic Energy:
L L
1 1 2
T = ∫ mẏ dx = ∫ m [ Ȧ 1 ( t ) f 1 ( x ) + Ȧ 2 ( t ) f 2 ( x ) ] dx
2
--
- --
-
2 2
0 0
1 2 2
= --- [ ( Ȧ 1 ) I 1 + 2 Ȧ 1 Ȧ 2 I 2 + ( Ȧ 2 ) I 3 ]
2

L L
mL mL
∫ 1 ∫ 1 2
2
where I 1 = m f ( x ) d x = -------- , I 2 = m f ( x ) f x d x = -------
-
30 60
0 0

L
mL
∫ 2
2
and I 3 = m f ( x ) d x = --------
-
105
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
More On Generalized Degrees of Freedom
Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations

Strain Energy:
L L
1 1
V = --- ∫ EI ( y'' ) dx = --- ∫ EI [ A 1 ( t ) f 1'' ( x ) + A 2 ( t ) f 2'' ( x ) ] dx
2 2
2 2
0 0
1 2 2
= --- [ ( A 1 ) I 4 + 2 A 1 A 2 I 5 + ( A 2 ) I 6 ]
2
where

L L
EI 4 EI 4
I 4 = ∫ EI f 1'' ( x ) dx = -------- ∫ EI f 2'' ( x ) dx = --------
2 2
3
-, I6 = 3
- and
0 L 0 L
L
EI 2
I5 = ∫ 1
EI f '' ( x ) f 2 '' ( x ) d x = --------
L
3
-
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
More On Generalized Degrees of Freedom
Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations

Lagrange Equations:

d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V
– + = Ȧ˙1 I 1 + Ȧ˙2 I 2 + A 1 I 4 + A 2 I 5 = 0
d t  ∂ Ȧ 1 ∂ A 1 ∂ A 1
and

d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V
– + = Ȧ˙1 I 2 + Ȧ˙2 I 3 + A 1 I 5 + A 2 I 6 = 0
d t  ∂ Ȧ 2 ∂ A 2 ∂ A 2

1 1
--- --- ˙
mL 2 EI 4 2 A 1
4 Ȧ 1 + -----
In matrix form: -------- -3 = 0 .
15 1 1 Ȧ˙2 L 2 4 A 2 0
--- ---
4 7
Note that both matrices are symmetric, positive definite.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Generalized Forces, Calculated by
Method of Virtual Work
Advanced Vibrations

Recall that the generalized force associated with the generalized


∂x n
coordinate q r is F r = ∑ F n ⋅
n
∂ qr

We examine the incremental work associated with increments of qr :

∂x n
δW = F r δq r = ∑ F n ⋅ δq r = ∑ F n ⋅ δxn
n
∂ q r n

The generalized force associated with the generalized coordinate qr is

δW
F r = --------
δq r

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
26 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Generalized Forces, Calculated by
Method of Virtual Work
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider an Euler Bernoulli


p(x)
beam simply supported at each
end. M0 ML
We consider moments M0 and
ML applied at the ends and a
distributed traction applied L
along the length of the beam.
We postulate a displacement distribution of the sort
2
x(L – x) x (L – x)
y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) -------------------
2
- + A 2 ( t ) ---------------------
3
-
L L
= A1 ( t ) f 1 ( x ) + A2 ( t ) f 2 ( x )

Lets calculate the generalized forces associated with the generalized


coordinates A 1 and A 2 .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
27 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Generalized Forces, Calculated by
Method of Virtual Work
Advanced Vibrations

The work done to the structure by the forces acting


through a virtual displacement δy = ( δ A 1 ) f 1 ( x ) , is
L
 
δW = δ A 1  – M 0 f 1' ( 0 ) + M L f 1' ( L ) + ∫ p ( x ) f 1 ( x ) dx
 0

L
 
so F A1 =  – M 0 f 1' ( 0 ) + M L f 1' ( L ) + ∫ p ( x ) f 1 ( x ) dx
 0

F A2 can be calculated similarly.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
28 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Homework for Lecture 8
A numerical experiment with linearization
Advanced Vibrations

Many times we have derived the equations for a spring


κ
θ̇˙ +  ----------2 θ + --- sin θ = 0 .
g
reinforced pendulum:
 R  κ
mR
R
2
The linearized form is θ̇˙ + ωL θ = 0 where
θ
2 κ g
ωL = ----------2 + --- . m
mR R

We use the linearized frequency to non-dimensionalize the time


parameter. Define τ = ω L t , define φ ( τ ) = θ ( τ ⁄ ω L ) , and define
g⁄R
α = ---------
2
-
ωL

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
29 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Homework for Lecture 8
continued
Advanced Vibrations

2 2 2
dφ dθ 1 dφ
Then
2
= ------
2 2
and
2
+ [ ( 1 – α )φ + α sin φ ] = 0
dτ d t ωL dτ
1. Solve numerically the dimensionless governing equation for the

initial conditions: φ ( 0 ) = π and dφ = 0 over the period


dτ 0
( 0, 6π ) for the three cases: α = 0 , α = 1 ⁄ 2 , and α = 1 .
π
2. Do the same as above but for the initial conditions φ ( 0 ) = --- and
6
dφ = 0
dτ 0

3. Compare and discuss the your results for parts 1 and 2.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
30 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Next Time

Example problems students choice and discussion of


past material.

Discussion of mid-term exam.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
31 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture8.frm
Slides of Lecture 9

Advanced Vibrations

Another Example of Linearization

Another Example of Lagrange Equations with


Generalized Degrees of Freedom

In-Class Practice of Problems of Students’s Choice

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization
Advanced Vibrations

Derive the governing


equations for x, y1, & y2
for the car shown. m, J x
Then linearize this set L L
of three equations. y1 y2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

y2 – y1
Define the angle θ so that sin θ = ---------------- . This is the rotation of the
2L
car about its c.g. Also, define the vertical displacement
y = ( y 1 + y 2 ) ⁄ 2 of the c.g.

m 2 m 2 J 2
Express the kinetic energy: T = ---- ẋ + ---- ẏ + --- θ̇
2 2 2
k 2 k 2
The potential energy is V = mgy + --- y 1 + --- y 2
2 2
Derive the governing equation for each of x , y 1 , and y 2 :

d  ∂T  ∂V
+ = mẋ˙ = 0

d t ∂ ẋ  ∂x
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

∂T ∂T ∂y ∂T ∂θ ∂T ∂x
=    +    +   
∂ ẏ 1  ∂ ẏ   ∂ y 1  ∂ θ̇  ∂ y 1  ∂ ẋ   ∂ y 1

mẏ J θ̇ 1
= ------
- – ------ -------------------------------------
2 2L y – y 2
1 –  ----------------
2 1
 2L 
m ( ẏ 1 + ẏ 2 ) J ( ẏ 2 – ẏ 1 )
= -------------------------- – ------ --------------------------------2-
2 2L y 2 – y 1

1 – ----------------
 2L 

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

d  ∂T  m ( ẏ˙1 + ẏ˙2 ) J ( ẏ˙2 – ẏ˙1 )


= -------------------------- – ------ --------------------------------2-

d t ∂ ẏ 1  2 2L y 2 – y 1

1 – ----------------
2  2L 
2J ( ẏ 2 – ẏ 1 )
– -------------2- ----------------------------------------
2
-
2
( 2L ) 1 –  --------------- y 2 – y 1
-
 2L  and similarly

d  ∂T  m ( ẏ˙1 + ẏ˙2 ) J ( ẏ˙2 – ẏ˙1 )


= -------------------------- + ------ --------------------------------2-

d t ∂ ẏ 2 2 2L y 2 – y 1

1 – ----------------
2
 2L 
2J ( ẏ 2 – ẏ 1 )
+ -------------2- ----------------------------------------
2
-
2
( 2L ) 1 –  --------------- y 2 – y 1
-
 2L 
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

∂V
= 0
∂x

∂V ∂V ∂y ∂V
=    +  
∂ y1  ∂ y   ∂ y 1  ∂ y 1
mg
= ------- + k y 1
2

∂V ∂V ∂y ∂V
=    +  
∂ y2  ∂ y   ∂ y 2  ∂ y 2
mg
= ------- + k y 2
2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization. Solution
Put it all together
Advanced Vibrations

d  ∂T  m ( ẏ˙1 + ẏ˙2 ) J ( ẏ˙2 – ẏ˙1 )


= -------------------------- – ------ --------------------------------2-

d t ∂ ẏ 1 2 2L y 2 – y 1

1 – ----------------
2
 2L 
2J ( ẏ 2 – ẏ 1 ) mg
– -------------2- ----------------------------------------
2
- = – ------- – k y 1
2
( 2L ) 1 –  --------------- y 2 – y 1 2
-
 2L 

d  ∂T  m ( ẏ˙1 + ẏ˙2 ) J ( ẏ˙2 – ẏ˙1 )


= -------------------------- + ------ --------------------------------2-

d t ∂ ẏ 2 2 2L y 2 – y 1

1 – ----------------
 2L 
2
2J ( ẏ 2 – ẏ 1 ) mg
+ -------------2- ----------------------------------------
2
-
2
= – ------- – k y 2
( 2L ) 1 –  --------------- y 2 – y 1 2
-
 2L 
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Linearization. Solution
Linearize
Advanced Vibrations

m ( ẏ˙1 + ẏ˙2 ) J mg
-------------------------- – ------ ( ẏ˙2 – ẏ˙1 ) = – ------- – k y 1
2 2L 2
and

m ( ẏ˙1 + ẏ˙2 ) J mg
-------------------------- + ------ ( ẏ˙2 – ẏ˙1 ) = – ------- – k y 2
2 2L 2

Please verify the above.

Though it is common to start linearizing earlier in the process,


premature linearization can sometimes lead to error. We shall see this
later.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
Another Example of Lagrange Equations
With Assumed Modes
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the cantilevered p(x)


beam shown at right. The
beam has bending
modulus EI, and a spring
of stiffness k at it end.
There is a distributed load EI, m
p(x,t) imposed as shown.
k
We postulate a defomation
espressed as L

2 2
x x (L – x)
y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) -----2 + A 2 ( t ) ---------------------
3
-
L L
= A1 ( t ) f 1 ( x ) + A2 ( t ) f 2 ( x )

We shall derive equations for the evolution of A 1 ( t ) and A 2 ( t ) . Note


that, by construction, A 1 ( t ) and A 2 ( t ) have dimensions of length.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Lagrange Equations
With Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations
Lets calculate the Kinetic Energy:
L
m
∫ ---2- ( ẏ )
2
T ( A 1, A2 ) = dx
0
1 2
= --- [ A ( t ) I 1 + 2 A 1 ( t ) A 2 ( t )I 2 + A 2 ( t )I 3 ]
2 1
where
L
mL
∫ m( f 1( x))
2
I1 = dx = --------
5
0
L
mL
I2 = ∫ m f 1 ( x ) f 2 ( x ) dx = --------
30
and
0
L
mL
∫ m( f 2( x))
2
I3 = dx = ---------
105
0
11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Lagrange Equations
With Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations
Lets calculate the Potential Energy:
L
EI k
∫ -----2- ( y'' )
2 2
V ( A 1, A2 ) = dx + --- ( y ( L ) )
2
0
1 2
= --- [ A ( t ) I 4 + 2 A 1 ( t ) A 2 ( t )I 5 + A 2 ( t )I 6 ]
2 1
L
∫ EI ( f 1 ′′ ( x ) )
2 2
I4 = dx + k ( f 1 ( L ) )
0 3
where = 4EI ⁄ L + k ,
L
I5 = ∫ EI f 1 ′′ ( x ) f 2 ′′ ( x ) dx + k f 1 ( L ) f 2 ( L ) , and
0 3
= – 2EI ⁄ L
L
∫ EI ( f 2 ′′ ( x ) )
2 2 3
I6 = dx + k ( f 2 ( L ) ) = 4EI ⁄ L
0
11/30/98 Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Lagrange Equations
With Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations

Lets finally calculate the generalized forces due to the applied pressure.

The virtual work associated with a virtual displacement δ A 1 is


L L
 ∂y 
δW 1 = ∫ p ( x, t ) δ A dx = ∫ p ( x, t ) f 1 ( x ) dxδ A1
 ∂ A 1 1
0 0

L
=> F 1 ( t ) = δW 1 ⁄ δ A 1 = ∫ p ( x, t ) f 1 ( x ) d x
0
Similarly

L
F 2 ( t ) = δW 2 ⁄ δ A 2 = ∫ p ( x, t ) f 2 ( x ) d x
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98
12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
More Lagrange Equations
With Distributed Displacement
Advanced Vibrations

Put it all together to find

I 1 I 2 Ȧ˙1 I 4 I 5 A1 F1(t )
+ =
I 2 I 3 Ȧ˙2 I 5 I 6 A2 F2(t )

Plugging in integrated values:

1 1 3
--- ------ F1(t )
EI  4 + --------- – 2 A 1
30 Ȧ˙1 + ----- kL
mL 5 3 
- EI  =
1 1 ˙ A2 F2(t )
------ --------- Ȧ 2 L –2 4
30 105

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

Review Of Homework From Lecture 8

A Short Quiz On Linearization.

Linearization Of Lagrange Equations

Properties Of Resulting Matrix Equations

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98
14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture9.frm
Slides of Lecture 10
Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class:

Review of Homework from Lecture 8


A short quiz on linearization.
Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Properties of Resulting Matrix Equations

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Homework from Lecture 8
A numerical experiment with linearization
Advanced Vibrations

Many times we have derived the equations for a spring


κ
θ̇˙ +  ----------2 θ + --- sin θ = 0 .
g
reinforced pendulum:
 R  κ
mR
R
2
The linearized form is θ̇˙ + ωL θ = 0 where
θ
2 κ g
ωL = ----------2 + --- . m
mR R

We use the linearized frequency to dimensionless the time parameter.


g⁄R
Define τ = ω L t , define φ ( τ ) = θ ( τ ⁄ ω L ) , and define α = ---------
2
-
ωL

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Homework for Lecture 8
continued
Advanced Vibrations

2 2 2
dφ dθ 1 dφ
Then
2
= ------
2 2
and
2
+ [ ( 1 – α )φ + α sin φ ] = 0
dτ d t ωL dτ
1. Solve numerically the dimensionless governing equation for the

initial conditions: φ ( 0 ) = π and dφ = 0 over the period


dτ 0
( 0, 6π ) for the three cases: α = 0 , α = 1 ⁄ 2 , and α = 1 .
π
2. Do the same as above but for the initial conditions φ ( 0 ) = --- and
6
dφ = 0
dτ 0

3. Compare and discuss the your results for parts 1 and 2.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Solution
Using Matlab
Advanced Vibrations

Using state space formulation:

– α sin ( x 2 ) – ( 1 – α )x 2
x = φ̇ , then ẋ =
φ x1

This appears as a function ‘pendu1.m’ provided to matlab:


function yprime = pendu1(t,x)
global alpha;
yprime = [ -alpha.*sin(x(2)) - (1-alpha).*x(2); x(1)];
return;

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 4
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Results
Calls to Matlab
Advanced Vibrations
T = [0:299]*(6*pi)/200; %define time array
%
phi_max = pi; % Initial Condition φ=π
%
alpha = 1;
[t,x] = ode23(’pendu1’, T , [0 phi_max]); %Runge-Kuta Integration
x1 = x;
%
alpha = 0.5;
[t,x] = ode23(’pendu1’, T , [0 phi_max]);
x2 = x;
%
alpha = 0.0;
[t,x] = ode23(’pendu1’, T , [0 phi_max]);
x3 = x;
%
plot(t,x1(:,2), t,x2(:,2), t,x3(:,2));
print pi -depsc
%
%
phi_max = pi/6;
%
alpha = 1;
[t,x] = ode23(’pendu1’, T , [0 phi_max]);
x1 = x;
%
alpha = 0.5;
[t,x] = ode23(’pendu1’, T , [0 phi_max]);
x2 = x;
%
alpha = 0.0;
[t,x] = ode23(’pendu1’, T , [0 phi_max]);
x3 = x;
%
plot(t,x1(:,2), t,x2(:,2), t,x3(:,2));
print pi6 -depsc
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
Solution for φ0=π
Advanced Vibrations

3
m
2

1
R
0

−1

κ
−2

−3
θ

−4
0 5 10 15 20 25 30

α=1 α=0.5 α=0.0 When the pendulum starts


displaced nearly vertically,
the restoring force due to
gravity is also near zero.
The more of the restoring force that is due to the torsional string, the
more that the response will appear to be harmonic.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 6
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Solution for φ0=π/6
Advanced Vibrations

0.6

0.4
κ
0.2

R
0
When the
pendulum starts θ
−0.2 only a little
distance from the m
−0.4 static equilibrium,
the ‘small angle’
−0.6
approximation is very good.
−0.8
0 5 10 15 20In that case, the linearity of
25 30

α=1 α=0.5 α=0.0 the result is nearly


independent of whether the
restoring force is due to the spring or to gravity.
Legitimate linearization requires that the linearized terms be nearly
equal to the corresponding nonlinear terms throughout the
deformation.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 7
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Short Quiz
Advanced Vibrations

This quiz should take about 15 minutes.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

In the limiting cases of small deflection ( q r « 1 ), small rates q̇ r « 1 ,


the Lagrange equations simplify.
We begin by looking at kinetic energy.

mn ˙ ˙ mn  ∂x˙n ∂x˙n
T = ∑ ------ x n ⋅ x n = ∑ ------ ∑ ∑  ⋅  q̇ r q̇ s
2 2 r s  ∂ q̇ r ∂ q̇ s
n n
Again, we make use of one of the core observations in the derivation of
˙
∂x n ∂x n
the Lagrange equations: =
∂ q̇ r ∂ qr

mn  ∂x n ∂x n 1
T = ∑ ------ ∑ ∑ ⋅ q̇ r q̇ s = ∑ ∑ --2- q̇r q̇s M̂ rs ( { q } )

2 r s ∂ qr ∂ qs 
n r s

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 9
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

In the limit of small displacement about the configuration of stable


s
equilibrium { q } , the mass matrix becomes

m n   ∂x n  ∂x n 
= M̂ rs ( { q } ) = ∑ ------ 
s
M rs ⋅ .
2   ∂ q r {q }
s  ∂ q s
{ q }
s
n

s
Note that M rs = M̂ rs ( { q } ) is still symmetric.

Important: In the limit of small displacement,

2
1 ∂T
T = ∑ ∑ 2 r s rs rs ∂ q̇r ∂q̇s
--
- q̇ q̇ M & M =
r s

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 10
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

Observe that the mass matrix is positive semi-definite. Consider an


t
array of generalized speeds { q̇ } . The corresponding kinetic energy is
1
∑ 2 rs r q̇s
t t t
T ( { q̇ } ) = --
- M q̇
r, s
1 t t m n   ∂x n  ∂x n 
= ∑ --- q̇ r q̇ s ∑ ------  ⋅ 
  ∂ q r  ∂ q s
{ q }
r, s
2 2 {q }
s s
n
mn   ∂x n  ∂x n  t t
= ∑ ------ ∑ ∑  ⋅  q̇ r q̇ s
2 r s   ∂ q r {q }
s  ∂ q s
{ q }
s
n

m n ˙t ˙t ˙t
= ∑ ------ y n ⋅ y n ≥ 0 where y n =  ∂x n
∑  ∂ qr
t
q̇ r
2 r {q }
s
n

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 11
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

The meaning of the mass matrix.

Consider the “acceleration” force


d  ∂T  d ∂ 1
= --- ∑ ∑ M st q̇ s q̇ t = ∑ M rs q̇˙s .
d t  ∂ q r d t  ∂ q̇ r 2 s t 
s

Next, consider column vector of generalized accelerations that are all


T
zeros except for a “1” on the r’th row: { q̇˙} r = 0 . 1 . . 0 . The
resulting “acceleration forces” seen by each of the other generalized
degrees of freedom are the r’th column of M .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 12
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Example of Mass Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider a
L1 L2 L3 L4 structure similar to
the disk-shaft
system in
E, Js Meirovitch.
Ignoring the
kinetic energy of
the shaft, the
J1, θ1 J2, θ2 J3, θ3 kinetic energy of
the systems is
1 2 1 2 1 2
T = --- J 1 θ̇ 1 + --- J 2 θ̇ 2 + --- J 3 θ̇ 3 .
2 2 2

2 J1 0 0
∂T
Our mass matrix is [ M ij ] = = 0 J2 0
∂ θ̇ i ∂θ̇ j
0 0 J3
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 13
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Another
Example of Mass Matrix
Advanced Vibrations
Consider a
cantilevered beam for
which we postulate a
displacement field EI, m
with two free
generalized L
coordinates:
y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) f 1 ( x ) + A 2 ( t ) f 2 ( x )
The kinetic energy in the beam will be
L
m 2
T ( A 1, A 2 ) = ∫ ---- ( ẏ ) dx
2
0
1 2
= --- [ Ȧ ( t ) I 1 + 2 Ȧ 1 ( t ) Ȧ 2 ( t )I 2 + ( 2 Ȧ 2 ( t ) )I 3 ]
2 1
L L
∫ m( f 1( x)) ∫ m( f 2( x))
2 2
where I 1 = dx , I 3 = dx
0 0
L
and I 2 = ∫ m f 1 ( x ) f 2 ( x ) dx
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
Another Example of Mass Matrix
Continued
Advanced Vibrations

2
∂T I1 I2
Our mass matrix is [ M ij ] = = m
∂ Ȧ i ∂ Ȧ j I2 I3

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the potential energy in the vicinity of a configuration of stable


equilibrium. In an equilibrium configuration, the sum of the potential
∂V
forces in each direction is zero 0 = – .
∂ qr

Taylor series expansion for V is


2
V ( { q } ) = V 0 + --- ∑ ∑ ∂ V
1
∆q r ∆q s + H.O.T. .
2 r s ∂ q ∂q
r s { qs }

2
We define the stiffness matrix to be K rs = ∂ V .
∂ q r ∂q s {q }
s

Note that, by construction, K is symmetric.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 16
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

Potential energy in terms of Stiffness. In the limit of small strains,


1
V = V 0 + --- ∑ ∑ K rs q r q s
2 r s
where we have redefined the generalized coordinates to be zero at the
equilibrium configuration. Usually, we set the datum so that V 0 = 0 .

Because stability requires that potential energy be at a local minimum,

∑ ∑ K rs qr qs ≥ 0 for all { q } . This is an assertion that the stiffness


r s
matrix is positive semi-definite.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 17
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Formal Linearization of Lagrange Equations
Derivation of System Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

The meaning of the Stiffness matrix.

Consider the generalized force


∂ 1
Fr = – --- ∑ ∑ K st q s q t = – ∑ K rs q s .
∂ qr  2 s t 
s

Next, consider column vector of generalized displacement that are all


T
zeros except for a “1” on the r’th row: { q } r = 0 . 1 . . 0 . The
resulting force seen by each of the other generalized degrees of
freedom are the r’th column of K .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 18
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
An Example Problem of Involving the
Stiffness Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider a
L1 L2 L3 L4 structure similar to
the disk-shaft
system in
G, Js Meirovitch.

J1, θ1 J2, θ2 J3, θ3

The strain energy in the shaft is computed in terms of the differences in


the rotations at the disks
2 2 2 2
1 θ ( θ – θ ) ( θ – θ ) θ
2 1
V = --- GJ s -----1 + ----------------------- 3 2
- + -----3 .
- + -----------------------
2 L1 L2 L3 L4

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 19
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
An Example Problem of Involving the
Stiffness Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

Our stiffness matrix is

1 1 1
----- + ----- – ----- 0
L1 L2 L2
2
∂V 1 1 1 1
[ K ij ] = = GJ s – ----- ----- + ----- – -----
∂ θ i ∂θ j L2 L2 L3 L3
1 1 1
0 – ----- ----- + -----
L3 L3 L4

Note that the i, j th element of K is the torque felt on disk i due to a


unit rotation imposed on disk j .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 20
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Another Example Involving the
Stiffness Matrix
Advanced Vibrations
Consider a
cantilevered beam for
which we postulate a
displacement field EI, m
with two free
generalized L
coordinates:
y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) f 1 ( x ) + A 2 ( t ) f 2 ( x )
The strain energy in the beam will be
L
EI
V ( A 1, A 2 ) = ∫ ------ ( y′′ ) dx
2
2
0
1 2 2
= --- [ A ( t ) I 4 + 2 A 1 ( t ) A 2 ( t )I 5 + A 2 ( t ) I 6 ]
2 1
L L
∫ EI ( f 1 ′′ ( x ) ) ∫ EI ( f 2 ′′ ( x ) )
2 2
I4 = dx , I 6 = dx
0 0
L
and I 5 = ∫ m f 1 ′′ ( x ) f 2 ′′ ( x ) dx
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
Another Example of Mass Matrix
Continued
Advanced Vibrations

2
∂V I4 I5
Our stiffness matrix is [ K ij ] = = EI
∂ Ai ∂ A j I5 I6

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 22
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Multiplication
A short review
Advanced Vibrations

T T
Say a and b are column vectors of length N , then b a = a b are
N
defined to be ∑ ar br . This is the inner product of algebraic vectors.
r=1

Say A is an N by N matrix, then the matrix vector product Aa is


N
 
defined so that the r th element of Aa is  ∑ Ars as 
î s=1 
N N
 
Combining the above two definitions: a Ab =  ∑ ∑ A rs a r b s
T
r = 1 s = 1 

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 23
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Multiplication
A short review
Advanced Vibrations

The product of two matrices is defined in a similar way. Say B is also


an N by N matrix also, then the product AB is defined as
N
( AB ) rs = ∑ Art Bts
t=1

The transpose of a matrix is that which is obtained by reversing the


T
order of the indices: ( A ) rs = ( A ) sr . The transpose of products is
N


T T T
found to be ( ( AB ) ) rs = ( AB ) sr = A st B tr = ( B A ) rs . In
t=1
T T T
matrix notion: ( AB ) = B A

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 24
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Flexibility Matrix
(Lets start using matrix notation)
Advanced Vibrations

In those cases where there are no rigid body motions, the stiffness
matrix is nonsingular, and we can define a flexibility matrix

–1
a = K .

In this case we observe that since F = – Kq , q = – aF .


The strain energy may now be expressed in terms of force

1 T 1 T 1 T
V = --- q Kq = --- ( – aF ) K ( – aF ) = --- F aF
2 2 2
Sometimes vibration problems are formulated in terms of the flexibility
matrix, though the use of displacement-based finite elements makes
flexibility formulations decreasingly popular.
Discussion of the flexibility matrix is presented here for completeness.
We shall do little more with it in this class.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 25
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Transformations
Advanced Vibrations

Say that we have derived the following matrix representation of a linear


system: Mq̇˙ + Kq = F where the column vector F contains all
externally applied load.
Now, say we select another set of generalized coordinates with which
we can specify the first set: q = Tβ . Lets re-derive our governing
equations in terms of β.
Kinetic Energy:
1 T 1 T 1 T T
T = --- q̇ Mq̇ = --- ( T β̇ ) M ( T β̇ ) = --- β̇ ( T MT )β̇
2 2 2
1 T 1 T 1 T T
Strain Energy: V = --- q Kq = --- ( Tβ ) K ( Tβ ) = --- β ( T KT )β
2 2 2
Potential Energy of Loading:

T T T T
A = – q F = – ( Tβ ) F = – β ( T F )
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 26
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Transformation
Lagrange Equation in New System
Advanced Vibrations

d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V
0
∂A
 – + = –
d t  ∂ β̇ r ∂ β r ∂ β r ∂ βr

becomes M̃β̇˙ + K̃ β = F̃
T T T
where M̃ = T MT , K̃ = T KT , and F̃ = T F

Note that the mass and stiffness matrices remain symmetric and at
least positive semi-definite.

T
If T is a nonsingular, square matrix, the transformation T AT is called
a congruence transformation of A.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 27
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Transformation
Advanced Vibrations

We often use such transformations


when introducing constraints to a
system. Here we consider two
independent pendulums. The kinetic
and potential energies are
m1 2 2 m2 2 2
T = ------ R 1 θ̇ 1 + ------ R 2 θ̇ 2 and R1
2 2 R2
V = – mgR 1 cos θ 1 – mgR 2 cos ( θ 2 ) F1 F2
m1
The potential energy of loading is m2
A = –F 1 R1 θ1 – F 2 R2 θ2
The linearized equations of motion are

2
m1 R1 0 θ̇˙1 mgR 1 0 θ1 F 1 R1
+ =
0
2
m2 R2 θ̇˙2 0 mgR 2 θ 2 F 2 R2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 28
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Transformation
Lets add a constraint
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the effect of connecting the


two masses with a massless rod. This
has the effect of requiring
R 1 θ 1 = R 2 θ 2 , permitting us to write

θ1 1
= θ1 . R1
θ2 R1 ⁄ R2 R2
F1 F2
m1
1 m2
Define T = . Then
R1 ⁄ R2

2
m1 R1 0 1
M̃ = 1 R 1 ⁄ R 2 = ( m 1 + m2 )R 12
0
2
m2 R2 R1 ⁄ R2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 29
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Transformation
With a constraint
Advanced Vibrations

m 1 gR 1 0 1
K̃ = 1 R 1 ⁄ R 2
0 m 2 gR 2 R1 ⁄ R2
2
R1
= m gR + m g -----
1 1 2 R-
2
The stiffness matrix is
and the applied force is

F 1 R1
F̃ = 1 R 1 ⁄ R 2 = R1 ( F 1 + F 2 )
F 2 R2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 30
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Matrix Transformation
With a constraint
Advanced Vibrations

The resulting equation for θ 1 is

2
 R 1
[ ( m1 + m2 )R 12 ]θ̇˙1 +  m 1 gR 1 + m 2 g ------ θ 1 = R 1 ( F 1 + F 2 )
 R 2

The addition of a constraint reduced the number of active degrees of


freedom by one.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 31
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

Short Orientation

LAB TOUR

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 32
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture10.frm
Slides of Lecture 11
Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class:

Eigen Analysis

This topic brings together our experience with matrix transformations


and with integrating systems of equations to motivate the search and
use of generalized eigen solutions.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Integration of Linearized Equations
Advanced Vibrations

Say that we have derived governing equations for a vibrating system


M ẋ˙ + Kx = F
To integrate this numerically, we might pose it in a state space
˙
formalism:
M 0 ẋ = – K ẋ + F .
0 M x –K x 0

This can be rearranged to ẏ = – A y + F̃


–1
where A = M 0 K and F̃ = F .
0 M –K 0
We have integrated these equations numerically in the past without a lot
of difficulty, but this approach can be impractical for large problems.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Integration of Linearized Equations
Advanced Vibrations

For large problems, integrating ẏ = – A y + F̃ , which involves


inverting the mass matrix once, but performing large matrix-vector
multiplies at every time-step can be daunting. We would like to reduce
the size of the algebraic problem that must be solved at each time step.
Modal analysis lets us do that.

Further, modal analysis provides additional advantages:


• providing a compact representation of the system dynamics

• facilitating modal truncation for model reduction

• providing a simple route to calculating transfer functions

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
A Digression Why Do We Not Worry
About The Singularity Of M?
Advanced Vibrations

Usually the mass matrix is constructed to


x1 x2 x3
be nonsingular, but it can happen that
one introduces massless degrees of m1 m2
freedom. Consider the following k1 k2 k3 k4
structure. It has two masses, but three
degrees of freedom. The node connecting the two springs is massless.
m1 2 m2 2
The kinetic energy is T = ------ ẋ 1 + ------ ẋ 2 . The mass matrix is
2 2
2 m1 0 0
∂T
M ij = so M = 0 0 0 , which is singular. We
∂ x i ∂x j
0 0 m2
T
demonstrate singularity by observing that a Ma = 0 when
T
a = 0 10

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 4
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Why Do We Not REALLY Worry
About The Singularity Of M?
Advanced Vibrations

We would really like to condense the degree of freedom x 2 out of the


problem. With the aid of the potential energy, we obtain an equation for
x 2 in terms of x 1 and x 3 .

k1 2 k2 2 k3 2 k4 2
V = ----- x 1 + ----- ( x 2 – x 1 ) + ----- ( x 3 – x 2 ) + ----- x 3 .
2 2 2 2
Equilibrium of the node at x 2 requires that

∂V
0 = = – k 1 x 1 + ( k 1 + k 2 )x 2 – k 3 x 3
∂ x2

k1 k3
from which we can solve for x 2 : x 2 = ---------------- x 1 + ---------------- x 3 .
k1 + k2 k2 + k3
(Compare the above to the second row of the stiffness matrix.)
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 5
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Why Do We Not REALLY Worry
About The Singularity Of M?
Advanced Vibrations

We use the above constraint to reduce the size of our system:

x1 1 0
x1 k1 k3
x2 = T where T = ---------------- ---------------- .
x3 k1 + k2 k2 + k3
x3
0 1

˙˙
T x1 T x1 T
Our new governing equations are T MT + T KT = T F
x3 x3
where M , K , and F are the mass matrix, stiffness matrix, and applied
force of the original problem.
In the rest of this development, we shall assume that the mass matrix is
positive definite.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 6
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Finding a de-coupled model for the system
Advanced Vibrations

Now that we know a lot about the effects of performing a linear


transformation of our variables, we can pose the following question:
Given a system defined by mass matrix M , mass matrix K , and dis-
placement variables x , does there exist a transformation matrix T a
T T
new set of variables x = Tβ and such that T MT and T KT are
each diagonal?

The answer will be YES, but we shall have to prove it by demonstrating


the transformation matrix that does the trick. We shall find that this
matrix is one whose columns are the eigenvectors of the M , K system.

An eigen-pair (eigen solution) of the generalized eigen-problem of M


and K are an eigenvalue λ and an eigenvector x such that
– λMx + Kx = 0
An eigen-pair is often represented as ( λ, x ) .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 7
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Does a solution exist?
Advanced Vibrations

How do we know that even one eigen-solution exists? Consider the


following extreme value problem.

From among all column vectors X that are not identically zero, find the
T
X1 K X1
column vector X 1 such that R 1 ( X 1 ) = ---------------------- is at a minimum.
T
X1 M X1

T
Let λ 1 = R 1 ( X 1 ) then for any y such that y M y > 0 ,
T
d ( X 1 + αy ) K ( X 1 + αy )
---------------------------------------------------------
- = 0.
d α ( X + αy ) M ( X + αy ) T
1 1 α=0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Does a solution exist?
Advanced Vibrations

After a bunch of linear analysis, and exploiting the symmetry of K and


M , we find that the above condition requires that
T
y ( K X 1 – λ 1 M X 1 ) = 0 for all nonzero y . From which we conclude
that K X 1 – λ 1 M X 1 = 0 . This proves the existence of the lowest
eigenvalue.
The existence of the next higher eigenvalue is proven by considering a
slightly modified minimization: Let
T
X KX . An evaluation of the appropriate
λ 2 = R 2 ( X 2 ) = min ----------------
T
0 < X MX X MX
T

T
X 1 MX = 0

derivative will show that K X 2 – λ 2 M X 2 = 0 . In this manner, we


demonstrate the existence of as many eigen-solutions as the dimension
of K and M .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 9
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Orthogonality where λ a ≠ λ b
Advanced Vibrations

Following is the standard proof that the eigenvectors are orthogonal, or


can be selected to be orthogonal to each other with respect to the mass
and the stiffness matrix. Say:

• that λ a and x a are an eigen pair to the M and K system

• that λ b and x b are another eigen pair to the M and K system

• and that λa ≠ λb

Then λ a M x a – K x a = 0 and λ b M x b – K x b = 0 .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 10
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Orthogonality where λ a ≠ λ b
Advanced Vibrations

λ a M x a – K x a = 0 and λ b M x b – K x b = 0 .
Observe that:

T T
1. λa xb M xa – xb K xa = 0
T T
2. λb xa M xb – xa K xb = 0

Subtracting one from the other, and exploiting symmetry of M and K ,


T T
we see that ( λ a – λ b )x a M x b = 0 . Since λ a ≠ λ b , x a M x b = 0 .

T
From either 1.) or 2.), we see also that xa K xb = 0 .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 11
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Orthogonality where λ a = λ b
Advanced Vibrations

Say:

• that λ a and x a are an eigen pair to the M and K system

• that λ b and x b are another eigen pair to the M and K system

• and that λ a = λ b = λ but that x a ≠ x b

Then λ a M x a – K x a = 0 and λ b M x b – K x b = 0 .
T T
Define x a = x a – cx b where c = ( x a M x b ) ⁄ ( x b M x b ) .
T
Note that ( λ, x a ) is still an eigen-solution, that x a M x b = 0 , and that
T
xa K xb = 0.
We have a new, equivalent, but orthogonal pair of eigen vectors.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 12
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Orthogonality and Normalization
Advanced Vibrations

The equation λMx – Kx = 0 leaves the vector x undetermined in


magnitude. If ( λ, x ) works, then so does ( λ, αx ) for any scalar α .

T
We normalize the eigenvectors so that x k M x k = 1 for each eigen
vector x k . This is Mass Normalization. These vectors are orthonormal
with respect to the mass matrix.

T
Note that because λk M xk – K xk = 0 , xk K xk = λk

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 13
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Significance of Orthogonality
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider the solution x ( t ) to M ẋ˙( t ) + Kx ( t ) = F ( t ) and


N
expand x(t ) = ∑ βk ( t )xk where xk is the k’th normalized
k=1
eigenvector, corresponding to the k’th eigen value λk .
We note that this expression is actually a change of variables
{ x } = P { β } where the columns of P are the normalized
eigenvectors. See what this does to the mass and stiffness matrices.

T T
P MP = I and P KP = Λ

where I is the N by N identity matrix and Λ is the diagonal matrix of


eigenvalues. Because M and K are positive definite, 0 < λ k for each
k.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 14
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

The matrix P is called the MODAL MATRIX.


If the eigenvalues are all unique, and the columns are ordered
according to the order of the eigen values, then the modal matrix is
unique.
If there are repeated eigenvalues, then the columns corresponding to
repeated eigenvalues in one version of the modal matrix must span the
space of the corresponding columns in any other version.

The β k are called MODAL COORDINATES. We shall use them quite a lot
as generalized coordinates.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
System Solution
Advanced Vibrations

In modal coordinates, the governing equation becomes

T
β̇˙ + Λβ = P F = F̃
We can solve for these modal coordinates, β k , individually. We can
solve for them numerically, and sometimes we can achieve analytic
solutions.
The solution in physical coordinates can be recovered from
x ( t ) = P β( t )

Lets examine free vibration: β̇˙ + Λβ = 0 . This has solution


 i λk t 
β k ( t ) = Re  A k e  . We now identify the eigenvalues in terms of
î 
2
natural frequencies: λk = ωk .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 16
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Another Motivation
Advanced Vibrations

We have motivated the search for eigen-solutions by looking for the


congruence transform that would diagonalize both the mass and the
stiffness matrix.

We can also motivate the search for eigen-pairs by asking ourselves:


Given the system M ẋ˙ + Kx = 0 , with some set of initial condi-
N
tions, can we express the solution as x(t ) = ∑ βk ( t )xk for some
k=1
set of basis vectors xk ?
The answer is YES, and we have demonstrated the character of the
eigenvectors x k in the proceeding slides.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 17
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Eigen Analysis
Another Motivation
Advanced Vibrations

N
Given M ẋ˙ + Kx = 0 , postulate a solution x ( t ) = ∑ βk ( t )xk
k=1

N
From which ∑ β̇˙k ( t )M xk + βk ( t )K xk . Consider the case where
k=1
β m ( 0 ) = 0 for all m ≠ k , then β̇˙k ( t )M x k + β k ( t )K x k = 0 .

 iω k t 
We expect a solution β k ( t ) = Re  A k e  , which yields
î 
2
– ω k M x k + K x k = 0 : the algebraic eigenvalue problem.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 18
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the system of two identical, freely


-hanging pendula shown. There are two
degrees of freedom, so the mass an θ1 θ2
stiffness matrices will each be 2x2, and
there will be exactly two eigen-pairs. R R
Lets first derive the linearized governing k
m 2 2 m 2 2
equations: T = ---- R θ̇ 1 + ---- R θ̇ 2 , m m
2 2
k 2 2
V = – m gR cos θ 1 – m gR cos θ 2 + --- R ( sin θ 2 – sin θ 1 )
2

mR
2
0 θ̇˙1 mgR +
2
kR – k R θ1
2
to find + = 0
θ̇˙2 mgR + kR θ 2
2 2 2
0 mR –k R

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 19
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

 2 θ1 
Lets look for solutions  ω ,  to the eigen-problem:
 θ2 

mR
2
2
0 θ1 mgR + kR
2
– k R
2 θ1
–ω + = 0
2 θ 2 2 θ
0 mR 2 –k R mgR + kR 2

In dimensionless form, this is

1
2 0 θ1 1 + γ – γ θ1
–α + = 0
0 1 θ2 –γ 1 + γ θ2

2 2
where α = ω R⁄g and γ = Rk ⁄ mg

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 20
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Combine the two matrices

1+γ–α
2
–γ θ1
= 0
–γ 1+γ–α
2 θ2

A non-trivial solution requires the determinant to be zero:


2 4
( 1 + 2γ ) – 2α ( 1 + γ ) + α = 0 .

2
This yields solutions α = 1 + γ ± γ = 1, 1 + 2γ .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 21
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

We substitute these back into the matrix equation to solve for θ1 & θ2 :

γ – γ θ 1 = 0 for α 2 = 1 , from which we see


–γ γ θ2
θ 1 = θ 2 . This is the pendula swinging in unison.

– γ – γ θ 1 = 0 for α 2 = 1 + 2γ , from which we


–γ –γ θ2
see θ 1 = – θ 2 . This is the pendula swinging counter
to each other.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 22
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Lets normalize these modes with respect to the mass matrix to


calculate our transformation matrix:

1
-------
1 0 1 = 2 => we must scale this mode: x = 2
11 1
01 1 1
-------
2

1
-------
1 0 1 = 2 => we must scale this mode: x = 2
1 –1 2
0 1 –1 1
– -------
2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 23
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Example Problem
Advanced Vibrations

If we guess the eigen-modes first, then we can deduce the eigenvalues


from the eigen equation.

1 1+γ–α
2
–γ θ1
Given x 1 ∼ , and = 0 , we find
1 –γ 1+γ–α
2 θ2

2
1–α = 0 =>
2
α1 = 1 .
2 0
1–α

2
Similarly, given x 2 ∼
1 , we find
1 + 2γ – α = 0 =>
–1 2 0
– 1 – 2γ + α
2
α 2 = 1 + 2γ .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 24
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Homework
Due Monday
Advanced Vibrations

L1 L2 L3 L4 Lets consider a structure similar to the


disk-shaft system in Meirovitch.
E, Js

J1, θ1 J2, θ2 J3, θ3


Ignoring the kinetic energy of the shaft:
• Derive the linear equations for this system

• Write the matrix eigen-equation

• Assuming thatJ 1 = J 2 = J 3 and that


L 1 = L 2 = L 3 = L 4 , write a dimensionless version of the
matrix eigen equation.

• Using Matlab, find the eigen solutions.

• Plot modes as in Fig 4.1.

• Write the modal matrix. Remember to normalize w.r.t. mass


matrix.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 25
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
What We Might Have Learned Up to Now
Advanced Vibrations

Governing Equations For Assembled Systems


Complex Representation For Force And Displacement In Steady State
RMS Quantities And Energy Dissipation In Steady State
Impulse Response Functions
Laplace Solution To Simple Systems
Lagrange Equations
Calculation Of Generalized Forces By Virtual Work And Potential
Energy Of Loading
Assumed Modes Method
Conservation Of Mechanical Energy
Linearization
A Little About Eigen-analysis

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 26
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture11.frm
Slides of Lecture 12
Advanced Vibrations

Today’s Class:
Review of Eigen-Analysis
Solution to Homework of Lecture 11
More Eigen-Analysis

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Recall
Advanced Vibrations

In Lecture 11, we found that the governing equations M ẋ˙ + Kx = F


are diagonalized by the transformation x = Pβ , where the columns of
2
P are the eigenvectors v n solving ( – ω n M + K )v n = 0 .
Those eigenvectors are mutually orthogonal with respect to the Mass
and Stiffness matrices. Further, we scale those columns so that they
are orthonormal with respect to the mass matrix:

T
P MP = I

2
In that case,
T
P KP = ωn

When a structure is correctly modeled by a finite number of discrete


2 T T
degrees of freedom, then ω 0 = min ( ( x Kx ) ⁄ ( x Mx ) )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Due Today
Advanced Vibrations

L1 L2 L3 L4 Lets consider a structure similar to the


disk-shaft system in Meirovitch.
G, Js

J1, θ1 J2, θ2 J3, θ3


Ignoring the kinetic energy of the shaft:
• Derive the linear equations for this system

• Write the matrix eigen-equation

• Assuming thatJ 1 = J 2 = J 3 and that


L 1 = L 2 = L 3 = L 4 , write a dimensionless version of the
matrix eigen equation.

• Using Matlab, find the eigen solutions.

• Plot modes as in Fig 4.1.

• Write the modal matrix. Remember to normalize w.r.t. mass


matrix.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 3
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

In Lecture 10, we derived stiffness matrix from the potential energy


2 2 2 2
1 θ ( θ – θ ) ( θ – θ ) θ
2 1
V = --- GJ s -----1 + ----------------------- 3 2
- + -----3 .
- + -----------------------
2 L1 L2 L3 L4

1 1 1
----- + ----- – ----- 0
L1 L2 L2
2
∂V 1 1 1 1
[ K ij ] = = GJ s – ----- ----- + ----- – -----
∂ θ i ∂θ j L2 L2 L3 L3
1 1 1
0 – ----- ----- + -----
L3 L3 L4

4
Note that J s is a polar moment of inertia of the area ( πR ⁄ 2 ). The
units of polar moment of inertia are Length4.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 4
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

We derived the mass matrix from the kinetic energy

1 2 1 2 1 2
T = --- J 1 θ̇ 1 + --- J 2 θ̇ 2 + --- J 3 θ̇ 3 .
2 2 2

2 J1 0 0
∂T
[ M ij ] = = 0 J2 0
∂ θ̇ i ∂θ̇ j
0 0 J3

Here J 1 , J 2 , and J 3 are mass moments of inertia. For a disk,


J M = ρJ A ∆H where ρ is mass density, J A is polar moment of
inertia, and ∆H is the disk thickness. The units of J M is are
Mass*Length2.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 5
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

The governing equation is

1 1 1
----- + ----- – ----- 0
L1 L2 L2
J1 0 0 θ̇˙1 θ1
1 1 1 1
0 J2 0 θ̇˙2 + GJ s – ----- ----- + ----- – ----- θ2 = 0
L2 L2 L3 L3
0 0 J 3 θ̇˙3 θ3
1 1 1
0 – ----- ----- + -----
L3 L3 L4

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 6
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

L 1 = L 2 = L 3 = L 4 = L and that
Assuming that
J1 = J2 = J3 = JM ,

1 0 0 θ̇ 1 GJ 2 – 1 0 θ 1
˙
s
JM 0 1 0 θ̇ 2
˙ + --------
- – 1 2 – 1 θ2 = 0
L
0 0 1 θ̇˙ 0 –1 2 θ3
3

The corresponding algebraic eigen-problem is

1 0 0 θ 1 GJ 2 – 1 0 θ 1
2 s
–ω J M 0 1 0 θ2 + --------
- – 1 2 – 1 θ2 = 0
L
0 0 1 θ3 0 –1 2 θ3

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 7
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

2 2JML
There is only one dimensionless group to form: Let α = ω ---------- .
GJ s
Our algebraic equation is now

 1 0 0 2 – 1 0  θ1
 2 
 – α 0 1 0 + –1 2 –1  θ2 = 0
 
 001 0 –1 2  θ3

The eigen-solutions are

 1⁄2   1⁄ 2   1⁄2 
     
 2 – 2, 1 ⁄ 2  ,  2, 0  ,  2 + 2, – 1 ⁄ 2 
     
 1⁄2   –1 ⁄ 2   1⁄2 
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 8
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

1⁄2 1⁄ 2 1⁄2
The MODAL MATRIX is P = 1⁄ 2 0 ( –1 ⁄ 2 )
1 ⁄ 2 –1 ⁄ 2 1⁄2
T T
Test diagonalization: P MP = P IP = I

2– 2 0 0
T
and P KP = 0 2 0
0 0 2+ 2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 9
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Homework
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

Mode Shapes

Mode 1
Lowest Energy

Mode 2

Mode 3
Highest Energy

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 10
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Systems with Rigid Body Modes
Advanced Vibrations

Because we know that the modes are orthogonal with respect to the
mass matrix, we may use known eigenvectors to reduce the size of the
remaining eigen-problem. This is particularly useful for systems with
easily recognized rigid body modes.
Consider the system shown. The
k k
m m m m
mass matrix is M = m
m

k –k
and the stiffness matrix is K = – k 2k – k . We see right away that a

–k k
T
rigid body mode is v 1 = 11 1 . (Observe K v 1 = 0 .)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 11
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Systems with Rigid Body Modes
Advanced Vibrations

We know that there are two remaining eigen modes and that they are
orthogonal to the rigid body mode:
v 1T Mx = m 1 1 1 x = m ( x 1 + x 2 + x 3 ) = 0 . This provides a
constraint that can be used to reduce the order of the system.

x 2 = – ( x 1 + x 3 ) defines a transformation matrix

x1 1 0 x
x2 = – 1 – 1 1 = Tx .
x3
x3 0 1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 12
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Systems with Rigid Body Modes
Advanced Vibrations

M = T MT = m 2 1 = T KT = k 5 4
T T
Resulting in and K
12 4 5
The eigenvectors of this reduced system are

1⁄ 2
v2 = 1 ⁄ 2 => v2 = T v2 = – 2 and
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2

–1 ⁄ 2
v 3 = – 1 ⁄ 2 => v 3 = T v 3 = 0
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 13
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Eigen Example
Another Assumed Modes Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider a simply


supported beam. We shall
approximate the deformed
shape by a low-order
polynomial satisfying the
geometric boundary conditions y ( 0, t ) = y ( L, t ) = 0 :
N k N
 x  x
y ( x, t ) = ∑ A k ( t ) --- 1 – -- =
 L  k ∑ Ak ( t ) f k ( x )
k=1 k=1

We shall use the A k ( t ) as generalized coordinates and solve for the


eigenmodes and frequencies in terms of them.

It is important to note that these polynomials can at best be


approximations for the vibration modes of this structure.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 14
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Eigen Example
Mass Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

The kinetic energy is


L N N 1
m 2 mL
T = ∫ ---2- ẏ dt = -------- ∑ ∑ Ȧi Ȧ j ∫ f i ( sL ) f j ( sL ) ds
2
0 i=1j=1 0
N N
mL 2
= -------- ∑ ∑ Ȧ i Ȧ j --------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 (i + j + 1)(i + j + 2)(i + j + 3)
i=1j=1

T
= ( mL ) Ȧ M Ȧ

2
where M ij = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i + j + 1)(i + j + 2)(i + j + 3)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Eigen Example
Mass Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

The potential energy is


L
EI 2
V = ∫ -----2- y'' dt
0 2 2
1
∂ f i  ∂ f j
N N
EI 
= --------4- ∑ ∑ A i A j ∫  2 ( sL )  2 ( sL ) ds
2L i = 1 j = 1 0
∂s  ∂s 
EI T
= --------
-A KA
4
2L
2
2ij ( i 2
+ j – 6 ( i + j ) + 3ij + 7 )
where K ij = --------------------------------------------------------------------------- for i+ j>1
(i + j – 1)(i + j – 2)(i + j – 3)

and K 11 = 4
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 16
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Eigen Example
Lagrange Equation
Advanced Vibrations

The governing equation is

( mL )M Ȧ˙ +  -----3- K A = 0
EI
 
L
The corresponding algebraic eigenvalue is achieved by postulating that
iωt
A ( t ) = Re { A 0 e } problem is

 – ( ω 2 mL ) M +  -----
EI  
- K A0 = 0
    3
L
2 3
2 ω ( mL )L
We nondimensionalize this by setting α = -------------------------- and the
EI
2
eigen problem is now ( –α M + K ) A0 = 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 17
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Eigen Example
Case N=1
Advanced Vibrations

1 1
M = 0.0333 , K = 4.000 .

2
Eigen solution α 1 = 120 and P 1 = [ 5.4772 ]

2
This asserts that the frequency α 1 = 120 is associated with the

y ( x ) =  ---  1 – --- .
x x
postulated shape
 L  L

From Lecture 11, we know that this is an upper bound for the square of
the first natural frequency.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 18
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Case N=3
Advanced Vibrations

0.0333 0.0167 0.0095 4.0000 2.0000 2.0000


3 3
M = 0.0167 0.0095 0.0060 K = 2.0000 4.0000 4.0000
0.0095 0.0060 0.0040 , 2.0000 4.0000 4.8000

2
α 1 = 97.47 4.4458 -14.4914 28.6397
3
Solution: α 2 = 2520 , P = 4.7965 28.9828 -132.7290
2
2
α3 = 17375 -4.7965 -0.0000 132.7290

2
This asserts that ω 1 = 97.47 is associated with the shape
2 3
 x  x   x
y ( x ) = 4.45 --- + 4.80 --- – 4.80 ---   x
1 – --- and is still an
 L  L   L    L
upper bound for the square of the first natural frequency.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 19
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Convergence with Of Eigenvalues
in Assumed Modes Problem
Advanced Vibrations

It is interesting to examine how the calculated natural frequency


Table 1:
Terms α12 α22 α32 α42 α52
1 120
2 120 2520
3 x97.47 2520 17400
4 x97.47 1572 17370 76188
5 x97.41 1571.8 x8161 76188 258502
Exact x97.409 1558.5 x7890 24937 x60880

depends on the number of assumed modes. There is a reason for this


that we will explore soon.
Note that even with the lowest order guess for the mode shape, we were
able to get a reasonable estimate for the first natural frequency.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 20
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Mode Shapes: Look at Approximation for
the First Mode for Each Order
Advanced Vibrations

As more polynomials are


admitted, the computed
1.4
mode shape appears to
converge on the exact
1.2
solution. In this case the
exact solution is 1

 x
y ( x ) = sin π -
--
0.8

 L 0.6

0.4

0.2

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1


x

N=1
N=3
N=5
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 21
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
An Important Distinction
About Eigenmodes and Eigenvectors
Advanced Vibrations

4.4458
In the above, X = 4.7965 is an exact eigenvector of the above
-4.7965

algebraic eigen problem. (MATLAB says so!).

BUT
2 3
 x  x   x
y ( x ) = 4.45 --- + 4.80 --- – 4.80 ---   x
1 – --- is very much
 L  L   L    L
NOT the exact first mode of the simply supported beam, even though it
is the best approximation that can be achieved with a quartic
polynomial.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 22
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
A More General Principle
Rayleigh Quotient
Advanced Vibrations

For any elastic system, the lowest natural frequency is achieved by that
displacement field that minimizes the ratio of potential to kinetic energy,

 V ( y )
λ = min ------------
 T ( y )
T (( y) > 0)

In the above, the field y is used as both the displacement and the
velocity field.
The above relation was already proven for cases of point masses, but
holds true for continuous systems. The minimization is over all
displacement fields which are square integrable and sufficiently
differentiable.
Restriction to a smaller set of displacement fields will yield an upper-
bound for the first eigen value.
We shall explore this more as we focus on continuous systems later on.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 23
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Advanced Vibrations

Next Time

Post-Mortem on MidTerm
Modal Damping
Modal Strain Energy
Transfer Functions

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 24
/home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture12.frm
Lecture 13
Advanced Vibrations

TODAY

Solutions To Midterm

Eigen Solutions to the Differential Equations


Damping Matrices
Modal Damping

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Mid-Term Take Home Exam
Problem 1. Assumed Modes
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the cantilevered Beam


shown here. There is a time- P(t)
dependent load applied at the end
and a dashpot placed at the center of
the span.
EI, m µ dy
Assume a single deformation mode: F = µ
dt
 x 2
y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) --- . L/2
 L
• Derive the governing equation L

for A1 ( t ) .
• Assuming that P is harmonic, calculate the complex
magnification factor for the tip displacement as a function of the
frequency.

• Calculate the time-averaged rate of energy dissipation as a


function of frequency and force amplitude.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution to Problem
Advanced Vibrations

2

y ( x, t ) = A 1 ( t ) -
x
-- .
P(t)
 L
L
m 2  x 4 Lm 2 EI, m µ dy
T = ∫ ---- Ȧ --- dx = ---------- Ȧ F = µ
2  L 2⋅5 dt
0 L/2

L
EI 2  2  2 4EI 2
V = ∫ ------ A -----2 dx = --------3- A L
2 L  2L
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution to Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Applied force: δW = Q P δA = Pδy ( L ) ⇒ Q P = P


Damping force:
Ȧ δA µ Ȧ
δW = Q D δA = F D δy  --- = – µ  --- ------ ⇒ Q D = – -------
L
 2  4 4 16

Lm ˙ µ Ȧ 4EI
The Lagrange equation is -------- Ȧ + ------- + --------- A = P ( t )
5 16 3
L

In more familiar terms, this is M Ȧ˙ + C Ȧ + KA = P


Lm µ 4EI
where M = -------- , C = ------ , and K = ---------
5 16 3
L

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution to Problem
Advanced Vibrations

iωt
Assume that P ( t ) = Re { P 0 e } , then we expect the resulting
iωt
displacement will be A ( t ) = Re { A 0 e } . Substitution into the
governing equation yields

2 iωt
Re { ( [ – ω M + iωC + K ] A 0 – P 0 )e } = 0
2
from which we conclude that [ – ω M + iωC + K ] A 0 = P 0

 ω 2 ω P0
which is re-arranged to 1 – ------ + 2iζ ------ A 0 = ------
 ω 0 ω0 K

2 K 20EI C µL 5
where ω 0 = ----- = -----------4- and ζ = --------------- = ------- -----------
M mL 2Mω 0 64 mEI

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution to Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Solving for A 0 in terms of P 0 ,

P0
A 0 = ------ H ( ω )
K
1
where H ( ω ) = ------------------------------------------------ is the Magnification Factor.
 ω 2 ω
1– ------ + 2iζ - -----
 ω 0 ω0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution to Problem
Advanced Vibrations

The average rate of energy dissipation is

2π ⁄ ω
ω
D = ------
2π ∫ P ( t )ẏ ( L, t ) dt
0
2π ⁄ ω
ω

iωt iωt
= -
----- Re { P 0 e }Re { iωA 0 e } dt

0
1 1
--
- ∗
= Re { ( P 0 ) ( iω A 0 ) } = --- Re { ( P 0∗ ) ( iωP 0 H ( ω ) ⁄ K ) }
2 2
3 2 3 2
L P0 L P0
= ω ----------------- Re { iH ( ω } = – ω ----------------- Im { H ( ω }
8EI 8EI

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Problem 2.
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the three pendula shown.


• Calculate the governing equations θ1 θ3
for the three angles θ 1 , θ 2 , & θ 3
in terms of the parameters shown. R R
(Ignore vertical components of
R/2
spring extension.)
m m
• Linearize the equations, evaluat-
ing the mass and stiffness matri- m
k k
ces.

• Impose the constraint that θ 1 = θ 3 , writing the constraint matrix.


Write the mass and stiffness matrices in the reduced system.

• Calculate the eigenmodes and frequencies in the reduced system.

• Express those eigenmodes in terms of the full set of displacement


degrees of freedom, θ 1 , θ 2 , & θ 3 .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

Derivation of governing equations:

2 k R 2
V = --- --- sin θ 2 – R sin θ 1 + ---  --- sin θ 2 – R sin θ 3
k  R
2  2 2  2
R
– mgR cos θ 1 – mg - cos θ 2 – mgR cos θ 3
-- .
2

∂V 2 θ 2
= mgRθ 1 + kR θ 1 – -----
∂ θ1  2
2
∂V R kR
= mg --- θ 2 + --------- ( θ 2 – θ 1 – θ 3 ) and
∂ θ2 2 2
∂V 2 θ 2
= mgRθ 3 + kR θ 3 – ----- after linearization.
∂ θ3  2
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

m 2 2 m  R 2 2 m 2 2
T = ---- R θ̇ 1 + ---- --- θ̇ 2 + ---- R θ̇ 3
2 2  2 2
Yielding the governing equations

1 0 0 θ̇ 1
˙
( 1 + γ ) –γ ⁄ 2 0 θ1
R
--- 0 1 ⁄ 4 0 θ̇˙2 + – γ ⁄ 2 ( 1 + γ ) ⁄ 2 – γ ⁄ 2 θ 2 = 0
g
0 1 θ̇˙ 0 –γ ⁄ 2 ( 1 + γ ) θ3
3

where γ = ( kR ) ⁄ ( mg )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

T  iωt T
Setting θ1 θ2 θ3 = Re  e A1 A2 A3 
î 
The resulting algebraic eigen problem becomes

1 0 0 A1 ( 1 + γ ) –γ ⁄ 2 0 A1
2
–α 0 1 ⁄ 4 0 A2 + –γ ⁄ 2 ( 1 + γ ) ⁄ 2 –γ ⁄ 2 A2 = 0
0 1 A3 0 –γ ⁄ 2 ( 1 + γ ) A3

2 2
where α = Rω ⁄ g

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

The constraint that θ 1 = θ 3 yields the constraint equation

A1 10
A1
A2 = T where T = 0 1 . The new matrices are
A2
A3 10

2(1 + γ ) –γ
T
K = T KT = 1 and
–γ --- ( 1 + γ )
2

M = T MT = 2 0
T
0 1⁄4

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

The eigen problem in this reduced system is

A1 2(1 + γ ) –γ A1
–α 2 0
2
+ 1 = 0.
0 1 ⁄ 4 A2 –γ --- ( 1 + γ ) A 2
2
2
2 ( 1 + γ ) – 2α –γ
det 2 = 0
1 α
–γ --- ( 1 + γ ) – ------
2 4
4
α 3 2
This has a characteristic equation ------ – --- ( 1 + γ )α + ( 1 + 2γ ) = 0
2 2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

3 2 1 2
The solutions are α = --- ( 1 + γ ) ± --- 1 + 2γ + 9γ . Substituting
2 2
this back into the algebraic eigen value problem

– (1 + γ ) −
2 1
+ 1 + 2γ + 9γ –γ
A2
1
--- [ ( 1 + γ ) −
2
–γ + 1 + 2γ + 9γ ] -----
A1
-
8

= 0
0

2
A2 1 + γ − 1 + 2γ + 9γ
yields ------ = – ------------ + ----------------------------------
A1 γ γ
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Map these modes back to original space
Advanced Vibrations

A1 10
A1
A2 = T where T = 0 1 , so our solutions are
A2
A3 10

1
 α 2 = 3--- ( 1 + γ ) ± 1--- 1 + 2γ + 9γ 2 , 1 + γ 1 + 2γ + 9γ
2
 2 2  – -----------
- −
+ ----------------------------------
γ γ
1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Examine Solution
Advanced Vibrations

Consider case where gravity dominate over spring forces: γ = 0 . The


3 1 2
two solutions are α = --- ± --- :
2 2

A1
= 1
2
α = 1 corresponds to and
A2 0

A1
= 0
2
α = 2 corresponds to
A2 1
as expected.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Examine Solution
Advanced Vibrations

Consider case where spring forces dominate over gravity: γ → ∞ . The


 3 3
2
two solutions are α = --- ± --- γ :
 2 2

A1
= 1
2
α = 0 corresponds to (rigid body motion), and
A2 2

2 A1 1
α = 3γ corresponds to =
A2 –4
as expected.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solutions to Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider the solution x ( t ) to M ẋ˙( t ) + Kx ( t ) = F ( t ) and


N
expand x(t ) = ∑ βk ( t )xk where xk is the k’th normalized
k=1
2
eigenvector, corresponding to the k’th eigen value ω k . This can be
expressed in matrix form as x ( t ) = Pβ ( t ) where P is modal matrix.

T T
This yields the system β̇˙ + Dβ = P F = where D = P KP is
the diagonal matrix of eigen values.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solutions to Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

Lets solve for the β via Laplace Transforms:


2 2
( s + ω k ) β k = sβ k ( 0 ) + β̇ k ( 0 ) + ( k ( t ) ) ( s )
This has the solution
t
sin ( ω k τ )
β k = β k ( 0 ) cos ω k t + β̇ k ( 0 ) sin ω k t + ∫ k ( t – τ ) ---------------------
- dτ
ωk
0

–1 –1
where the vector β̇ ( 0 ) = P ẋ ( 0 ) and β ( 0 ) = P x ( 0 )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solutions to Governing Equations
With Damping
Advanced Vibrations

The above development provided the solutions for problem with no


damping. The more general problem is where the damping is
represented by a general matrix C . In general, this will yield complex
modes, and we shall study that case later.

There is a class of damping matrices for which the elastic eigen modes
are preserved. These problems are much more tractable. Because
T T
P MP = I and P KP = D we may conclude that
–T –1 –T –1
M = P I P and K = P DP .
–T –1
This suggests looking for damping matrices C = P χP where χ
is also a diagonal matrix consisting of terms 2ζ k ω k on the diagonal.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Damping Matrices
Advanced Vibrations

We examine our dynamics equation

M ẋ˙ + C ẋ + Kx = F .
We diagonalize with the modal matrix to find

T
β̇ + χβ̇ + Dβ = P F =
˙

Again, we solve for the β via Laplace Transforms:


2 2
( s + 2ζ k ω k s + ω k ) β k = sβ k ( 0 ) + β̇ k ( 0 ) + k ( t ) for each k.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Solution
Advanced Vibrations

–1  1  – ζωt sin ( ω 1 – ζ 2 t )
Exploit that  -----------------------------------------
- = e --------------------------------------
 s + 2ζ k ω k s + ω k 
2 2
ω 1 – ζ2

–1  s  d  –ζωt sin ( ω 1 – ζ 2 t )
and that - =  e
 ----------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
 s + 2ζ k ω k s + ω k 
2 2 dt ω 1 – ζ2 

to solve for βk ( t ) .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Transfer Functions
Synthesized from Modal Response
Advanced Vibrations

The whole system is represented in Laplace space by

d T
( x ) = P ( β ) = PG P (F )
d
where G (s) is a diagonal matrix, whose diagonal terms are

d 1
G kk = -----------------------------------------
2
-
2
s + 2ζ k ω k s + ω k
we have assumed homogeneous initial conditions.
Say we want to find the transfer function from force DOF n to
displacement DOF m. Then

modes


d
G mn ( s ) = P mk G kk P nk
k=1
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Modal Damping
Advanced Vibrations

The assumption made above, that the damping matrix is diagonalizable,


is the assumption of modal damping.
Note that modal damping includes the special cases of proportional
damping:

M ẋ˙ + ( aM + bK )ẋ + Kx = F ( t )
is diagonalized by the modal matrix. x = Pβ as

β + ( aI + bD )β̇ + Dβ = .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Modal Damping Terms
Advanced Vibrations

We see the advantages of assuming modal damping, the question


becomes: “How do we deduce that damping ζ k associated with each
mode?”
There are three standard answers.
1. Experimentally. Plot frequency response, identify peaks with eigen
frequencies, and determine fraction for critical damping from the
half power points.

T
2. Where a real damping matrix is known, compute P CP and
discard the off-diagonal terms

3. Where the damping mechanism can be modeled, set the model


damping to reproduce the dissipation ratio associated with modal
vibration. This is the modal strain energy method.

Examples and discussion follow.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

More on Modal Damping and the Modal Strain Energy Method.


An Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 26 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture13.frm
Lecture 14
Advanced Vibrations

TODAY

More on Damping Matrices and Modal Damping


Linear Viscoelasticity

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
RECALL
Advanced Vibrations

We saw the advantages of assuming modal damping, the question


became: “How do we deduce that damping ζ k associated with each
mode?”
There are three standard answers.
1. Experimentally. Plot frequency response, identify peaks with eigen
frequencies, and determine fraction for critical damping from the
half power points.

T
2. Where a real damping matrix is known, compute P CP and
discard the off-diagonal terms

3. Where the damping mechanism can be modeled, set the model


damping to reproduce the dissipation ratio associated with modal
vibration. This is the modal strain energy method.

Examples and discussion follow.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Damping from Experimental Data
Advanced Vibrations

Experimental measurements yield impulse hammer


plots of acceleration versus
frequency. Ideally, each peak is
accelerometer
associated with a distinct natural
mode of the system.
We say in the first portion of the test
that we could deduce the damping
of a single degree-of-freedom by
examination of the “half power
points”. ζk= ∆ω/ωk
We can perform the same analysis |a|
for each of the modal peaks that are
manifest from the experimental data,
yielding a fractions for critical
damping for those modes.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
from Full Damping Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

Say we are give a system

2 1 ẋ˙1 + 2 0 ẋ 1 + 2 – 1 x 1 = 0
1 2 ẋ˙2 0 3 ẋ 2 –1 2 x2 0
In Matlab,
[P,D] = eig(k,m) :Find the generalized eigen solution:
PP =P/sqrt(P’*m*P) :Normalize the modal matrix
Cm = PP’*c*PP ;map the damping matrix to modal coordinates
2.5000 -0.2887
-0.2887 0.8333

C = 2.500 0
d
The diagonal of this matrix is
0 0.833
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
from Full Damping Matrix
Advanced Vibrations

The full system in modal coordinates is

1 0 β̇˙1 + 2.500 0 β̇ 1 3 0 β1
+ = 0
0 1 β̇˙2 0 0.833 β̇ 2 0 0.333 β 2 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

Given a system with mass matrix M and stiffness matrix K ,


1. compute the modal matrix P . Each eigen mode corresponds to a
column of P.
2. compute the energy dissipation per cycle when the system is
forced to undergo the deformation of the k’th eigen mode at the k’th
eigen frequency

3. Calculate the maximum strain energy in that cycle.

4. Calculate the ratio of the dissipation to energy storage

5. Set the modal dissipation to reproduce the same ratio in modal


coordinates.

This requires and example

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the system to the right, the k k k


mass and stiffness matrices are m m
µ

M = m 1 0 and K = k 2 –1 . The algebraic eigen problem is


01 –1 2

 m 10 2 – 1  x1
 – ω ----
2 +  = 0 , having eigen solutions
 k 01 –1 2  x2

   
---- = 1 , 1 ⁄ 2 
  ω2  m and   ω  ---- = 3 ,
1⁄ 2 
2 m
  k      k   
 1⁄ 2   –1 ⁄ 2 

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

The energy dissipation associated with the dashpot is

2π ⁄ ω


2
D = µ ( ẋ 2 – ẋ 1 ) dt
0

 
x1  iω1 t 1 ⁄ 2 
For the first mode, = Re  Ae ,
x2  1⁄ 2 
î 

 iω 1 t 
ẋ 2 – ẋ 1 = Re  iω 1 Ae ( 1 ⁄ 2 – 1 ⁄ 2 )  = 0 => ζ 1 = 0
î 
The second mode will be more interesting.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

The energy dissipation associated with the dashpot is

2π ⁄ ω


2
D = µ ( ẋ 2 – ẋ 1 ) dt
0

 
x1  iω2 t 1 ⁄ 2 
For the second mode, = Re  Ae ,
x2  –1 ⁄ 2 
î 

 iω 2 t  iω 2 t
ẋ 2 – ẋ 1 = Re  iω 2 Ae ( 1 ⁄ 2 + 1 ⁄ 2 )  = 2ω 2 Re { iAe }
î 
The dissipation is D = 2µω 2 π ( A∗ A ) .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

The energy storage is


T
k iω 2 t 2 1 ⁄ 2 2 –1 1 ⁄ 2
V = --- ( Re { Ae } )
2
–1 ⁄ 2 –1 2 –1 ⁄ 2

3k iω 2 t 2
= ------ ( Re { Ae } )
2

3k
and the max storage is V max = ------ A∗ A .
2

D 2µω 2 π ( A∗ A ) 4 µω 2
The dissipation ratio is ------------ = --------------------------------- = --- ----------
V max 3k 3 k
------ A∗ A
2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

The corresponding analysis in modal coordinates is

2
β̇˙2 + 2ζω 2 β̇ 2 + ω 2 β 2 = 2

iω 2 t
Here, we assume that β 2 = Re { Be }.
The energy dissipation per cycle is
2π ⁄ ω 2
2 π
∫ 2ζω 2 ( β̇ 2 ) dt = ------ ( 2ζω 2 )ω 2 ( B∗ B ) =2πζω 2 ( B∗ B )
2 2
D =
ω2
0

2
ω2
The max energy stored per cycle is V max = ------ ( B∗ B ) so the
2
dissipation ratio is 4πζ .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Modal Damping Terms
By Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

We now set those damping ratios equal,

4 µω 2 µω 2
--- ---------- = 4πζ 2 => ζ 2 = ----------
3 k 3πk

Our two modal equations are:

2 2
β̇ 1 + ω 1 β 1 =
˙
1 and β̇ 2 + 2ζ 2 ω 2 β̇ 2 + ω 2 β 2 =
˙
2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Advanced Vibrations

Here we restrict our attention to rubbery polymers.


Such polymers have Poisson’s ratio τ
almost 0.5; we can ignore volumetric d
strains. In what follows, we restrict h
attention to problems for which all
relevant deformations are in shear.
Engineering shear strain is defined
The theory of linear viscoelasticity as γ = d/h
relates the current stress to the
history of strain. The dependence is linear and time-translation
invariant. This requires a constitutive equation of the sort:

t
σ(t ) = ∫ G ( t – τ )γ̇ ( τ ) dτ
–∞

where G ( τ ) , the relaxation modulus, is a function of time


characteristic of the material. There are sophisticated laboratory
methods of measuring the relaxation modulus.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Oscillatory Strain
Advanced Vibrations

For oscillatory deformation, the strain can be expressed


iωt iωt
γ ( t ) = A sin ( ωt + ψ ) = Im ( γ 0 e ) so γ̇ ( t ) = Im ( iωγ 0 e )
We expect that the resulting stress will harmonic at the same
iωt
frequency: σ ( t ) = Im { σ 0 e }.
These are substituted into the constitutive equation to find
σ 0 = γ 0 ( G′ ( ω ) + iG′′ ( ω ) ) where
∞ ∞
G′ ( ω ) = ∫ ωG ( τ ) sin ( ωτ ) dτ &G′′ ( ω ) = ∫ ωG ( τ ) cos ( ωτ ) dτ
0 0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Oscillatory Strain
Advanced Vibrations

The stress associate with γ ( t ) = A sin ( ωt + ψ ) is


AG′ ( ω ) sin ( ωt + ψ ) + AG′′ ( ω ) cos ( ωt + ψ )

Common laboratory techniques measure G′ and G′′ directly.

The storage modulus G' ( ω ) is an indicator of the ability of the polymer


to store mechanical energy. The loss modulus G'' ( ω ) is an indicator of
the ability of the polymer to dissipate mechanical energy.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Superposition
Advanced Vibrations

Linear viscoelastic materials have the property of being linear.


The stress resulting from the superposition of strain histories is the
superposition of the stresses associated with those histories.

If γ (t) = ∑ Ak sin ( ωk t + ψ k ) , then


k

τ(t ) = ∑ Ak G' ( ωk ) sin ( ωk t + ψ k )


k

+ ∑ A k G'' ( ω k ) cos ( ω k t + ψ k )
k

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Energy Dissipation and Storage
Advanced Vibrations

At a given frequency ω , the energy dissipation per cycle per unit


volume is

2π ⁄ ω
ED = ∫ τ ( t )γ̇ ( t ) dt
0
2π ⁄ ω
= A2 ∫ [ G' ( ω ) sin ωt + G'' ( ω ) cos ωt ]ω cos ( ωt ) dt
0
2
= πA G'' ( ω )

The max energy stored per unit volume in a cycle is estimated as


1 1 2
E S = --- max [ ( A sin ωt ) ( AG' ( ω ) sin ωt ) ] = --- A G' ( ω )
2 2
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Energy Dissipation and Storage
Advanced Vibrations

The loss factor η of either a structure or a material is defined by


ED
η ( ω ) = ------------- . For a linearly viscoelastic material,
2πE S
η ( ω ) = G′′ ( ω ) ⁄ G′ ( ω ) = tan δ ( ω )
The general forms
of the storage
modulus and loss
log G” log G'

modulus are G’
illustrated in the
figure
Loss modulus is
maximum where
storage modulus is G”
steepest

log ω

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Solution of Transient Problems
Advanced Vibrations

Rigorous solution of transient problems is much more difficult. Using


assumed modes, virtual work, and Lagrange Equations, we derive the
following form of equation for structures of elastic and viscoelastic
material

t
M ẋ˙ + Kx + ∫ Γ ( t – τ )ẋ ( τ ) dτ = F (t)
–∞

where the matrix Γ is constructed of the relaxation moduli of the


viscoelastic materials in the structure. This equation is very hard to
solve in the time domain.
The form is simplified a little by resort to Laplace
2
transforms: s MX ( s ) + ( K + s ( Γ ) )X ( s ) = L(F ) ,
but inversion of this system of equations is usually impractical.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Viscoelasticity is Easier
in the frequency domain
Advanced Vibrations

– ω M X ( ω ) + K X ( ω ) + Γ∗ ( ω )X ( ω ) = F ( ω )
2

Some finite element computer codes, including NASTRAN, can address


this problem in frequency space. Again, inversion to the time domain
can be a problem, but we often have an intrinsic interest in the
frequency domain representation itself.

Correspondence Principle (Part One)


The governing equations in frequency space for a linearly viscoelastic
structure are those of the corresponding elastic structure, but with
elastic material properties replaced by complex material properties.

Correspondence Principle (Part Two)


This part is not as useful to us here. It observes that the solution to a
quasi-static viscoelastic problem can be obtained by inversion of the
Laplace transform mapped from the solution of a corresponding elastic
problem.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Steady State Oscillation
Advanced Vibrations

Steady State, harmonic response of a x


single degree of freedom system: F0sinωt
k
Consider the system shown. The mass m
sits on a pad of thickness h, and area
A. At the imposed frequency, the G’, G”, h, A
storage and loss moduli are G’(ω) and
G”(ω), respectively.
k x(t) F0sinωt
We anticipate that the steady state
motion of the mass will be m

x ( t ) = X sin ( ωt + φ ) . Fv(t)
Fv(t)
In complex notation,
iωt
F ( t ) = F 0 Im { e } and
i ( ωt + φ ) iωt iφ
x ( t ) = X Im { e } = Im { X 0 e } where X 0 = X e

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Advanced Vibrations

The force applied to the polymer is


XA
F v ( t ) = -------- ( G' ( ω ) sin ( ωt + φ ) + G'' cos ( ωt + φ ) )
h
A iωt
= --- Im { X 0 e ( G' ( ω ) + iG'' ( ω ) ) }
h
The equation of motion of that mass is
F0sinωt
mẋ˙ = F 0 sin ωt – kx ( t ) – F v ( t ) . k x(t)
m
Fv(t)
Making all the appropriate Fv(t)
substitutions, we find

2 A
– ω mX 0 = F 0 – k X 0 – X 0 --- ( G' + iG'' )
h
Note the similarity to the elasto-dynamics problem.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Advanced Vibrations

2 A
– ω mX 0 = F 0 – k X 0 – X 0 --- ( G' + iG'' )
h
From which we can solve for the complex frequency response function
for normalized displacement as a function of frequency:

X0 1
------ ( ω ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
F0 [ k + ( A ⁄ h )G' ( ω ) – mω ] + i ( A ⁄ h )G'' ( ω )
2

X0 1
Note that ------ ( ω → ∞ ) = -------------- , as it should. This is mass loading.
F0 –ω m
2

X0 1
Also note that ------ ( 0 ) = -------------------------------------- , as it should. This is the
F0 k + ( A ⁄ h )G' ( 0 )
static response.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
A Material
Advanced Vibrations

Lets examine the response of a real system. The following plot for
polyisobutylene is taken from “Vibration Damping” by Nashif et. al.

E’=3G’

tan(δ)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Advanced Vibrations

ω 5
We can fit the above plots reasonably well in 0.1 < ------ < 10 by

ω 3.3
Log ( 3G' ( ω ) ) = Log ( E' ( ω ) ) = 6.2 + 0.0112  Log  ------  or
  2π 

  ω   3.3
5.72 + 0.0112 Log ------
  2π 
G' ( ω ) = 10 and

 ω   ω  2
Log ( tan δ ( ω ) ) = – 1 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ so
 2π   2π 

G'' ( ω ) = G' ( ω ) tan δ ( ω )


 ω   ω  2   ω   3.3
4.72 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ + 0.0112 Log ------
 2π   2π    2π 
= 10
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Advanced Vibrations

The above
7
approximations 10
show the correct
behavior at low
frequencies
6
10 G’

5
10
G”

4
10

3
10
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
f=ω/2π

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 26 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Advanced Vibrations

Lets assign properties to the problem x


we discussed above. F0sinωt
k
Say our mass is 0.10m x 0.10m in area, M
0.1m high, and made of steel.
G’, G’’, h, A
2
A = ( 0.1m ) ( 0.1m ) = 0.01m
3
M = ( 0.1m ) ( 0.1m ) ( 0.1m ) ( 7700kg ⁄ m ) = 7.7kg
Set h = 0.01m and k = 3E6N ⁄ m
Then A ⁄ h = 1.0
We shall calculate the fraction of critical damping by two methods:
• Examination of half-power band width. This reflects the true
material properties.

• Modal strain energy. This is approximate.


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 27 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Fraction of Critical Damping in
Viscoelastic Structure
Advanced Vibrations

Lets calculate the damping by examination of the half power points.


−6
x 10
2.5

Case h=0.01 so A/h=1.0


2
ζ=0.069
X0/F0

1.5

0.5

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
f (Hz)
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 28 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Fraction of Critical Damping in
Viscoelastic Structure
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider
x 10 another case:
−5

2.5

2
Case h=0.10 so A/h=0.1

ζ=0.0084
X0/F0

1.5

0.5

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

f (Hz)
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 29 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Advanced Vibrations

The above treatment is that for a steady state oscillatory response.

To solve this system in the time domain, we must


• solve an integro-differential equation (usually not a good idea)

• approximate this problem by a second order system with


constant coefficients. This is what modal strain energy was made
for.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 30 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Solution of Transient Problems
Advanced Vibrations

In order to solve transient problems involving linearly


viscoelastic materials, we need a simpler approach.
The approach that has developed over the last four
decades is:
• Map the elastic problem to mode space

• Estimate modal damping via the modal strain


energy method

• Integrate the resulting modal equations

• Map displacements back to spacial degrees of


freedom
We shall see some examples using modal strain energy to estimate
modal damping for viscoelastic structures.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 31 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Damping from Modal Strain Energy
Advanced Vibrations

Lets see what damping model we get from the modal strain energy
method applied to our earlier problem.

1⁄2
For the elastic system, ωn = ( k ⁄ m ) = 624 /sec =>
f n = 100 Hz. Lets look at the energy dissipation per cycle of this
single degree of freedom system when oscillating at its resonant
frequency at amplitude B:

2 2 5
E D = πB ( A ⁄ h )G'' ( ω n ) = πB ( 4.74 ×10 N ⁄ m )
The energy stored per cycle is

1 2 1 2 6
E S = --- B ( k + G' ( ω ) ( A ⁄ h ) ) = --- B 3.07 ×10 N ⁄ m
2 2
ED
2ζ = η = ------------- = 0.134 => ζ = 0.067
2πE S
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 32 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Approximation with 2nd Order System
Advanced Vibrations

Our approximate model for the viscoelastic system is

2
β̇˙ + 2ζω n β̇ + ω n β = F ⁄ M
We convert back to spacial coordinates:

M ẋ˙ + 2ζ KM ẋ + Kx = F ( t )

In order to recover the static response, the stiffness we use is that


computed at frequency ω = 0 :
6
K = k + ( A ⁄ h )G' ( 0 ) = 3.54 ×10 N ⁄ m .
We just found the found the fraction of fraction of critical damping
ζ = 0.067 , and the mass remains M = 7.7kg

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 33 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Approximation with 2nd Order System
Advanced Vibrations

Lets compare this approximation to the actual system for the case of
iωt
steady state harmonic excitation: F = Im { F 0 e } and
iωt
x = Im { X 0 e } yielding

1
X 0 ⁄ F 0 = ----------------------------------------------------------------
2
-
[ ( K – Mω ) + i2ζω KM ]

Lets compare this approximation to the full viscoelastic system.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 34 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Comparison of Linear Viscoelastic Model
with Second Order System
Advanced Vibrations

−6
x 10
2.5

viscoelastic system

second order
2
approximation
X0/F0

1.5

0.5

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

f (Hz)
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 35 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Introduction to Linear Viscoelasticity
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Advanced Vibrations

Matlab code for the above:


% Calculate response of systems in slides page 28 and page 35 % find the half power points
% of Lecture 14 cross=0;
% spring stiffness and the mass for i=2:Points
k=3e6 if( (Ha(i)-Hmax/2^0.5)*(Ha(i-1)-Hmax/2^0.5) <0 )
m=7.7 cross = cross+1;
% ic(cross) = i;
% Repeat current value of Ah end
Ah end
% %
% specify the frequency range to examine %mark these points
fmin = 10.0; fmax = 180.0; f0 = f(i0); f1 = f(ic(1)); f2 = f(ic(2));
Points = 1001; h0 = Ha(i0);h1 = Ha(ic(1)); h2 = Ha(ic(2));
f(i) =fmin + (fmax-fmin)*(i/Points); %
w(i) = f(i)*2*pi; %%evaluate fraction of critical damping
% zeta = (f2 - f1)/(2*f0)
% Interpolating formulae for storage and loss moduli %
gp(i) = real(10.0^(5.72 + 0.0112*(log10(f(i)))^3.3)); %%try modal strain energy method
gpp(i) = real(10.0^(4.72+0.56*log10(f(i)) -0.069*(log10(f(i)))^2 + Ed = pi*Ah*gpp(i0);
0.0112*(log10(f(i)))^3.3)); Es = 0.5*(k+gp(i0)*Ah);
% Driving point frequency response. A complex function of eta = Ed/(2*pi*Es);
frequency zetaE = eta/2
H(i) = 1.0/(k+Ah*gp(i)-m*w(i)^2 + j*Ah*gpp(i)); %
end % Plot the magnitude of driving point frequency response and
% % mark the points
Ha = abs(H); % magnitude of the driving point frequency p1 = plot(f,Ha,’r-’, f0,h0,’b+’, f1,h1,’b+’, f2,h2,’b+’);
response %
% %
% Power is proportional to the square of displacement %plot the modal approximation to the frequency response
amplitude. for i=1:Points
% We shall find the half power points HM(i) = 1.0/(k+Ah*gp(1)-m*w(i)^2 + j*(2*zetaE*m*w(i)*(k/
ic = [1 Points]; % array of indices of half power points m)^0.5));
i1 = 1; i2=Points; HMa(i) = abs(HM(i));
Hmax = max(Ha); end
% find the frequency where Ha is maximum % Plot it and compare with the ViscoElastic model
i0 = find( abs(Ha - Hmax)<1.0e-10); p2 = plot(f,Ha,’r-’, f, HMa, ’g.’);

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 36 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Vibration of Linearly Viscoelastic Structures
Summary of Modal Strain Energy Method
Advanced Vibrations

1.Perform eigen solution of linear elastic system, cal-


culating modes and frequencies.
2.For each mode, calculate the elastic energy ES
stored in the system when it is deformed to the
extreme of each mode. For viscoelastic parts of the
structure, use the storage modulus at those eigen
frequencies.
3.For each mode, calculate the energy ED dissipated
per cycle.
ED
4.For each mode, set ζ k = -------------
2πE S

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 37 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

Introduction to Frequency Response Methods

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 38 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14.frm
Lecture 14.5
Advanced Vibrations

COMPLEX MODES

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
State Space Formulation
Advanced Vibrations

What happens when we cannot assume modal damping?


As usual, we assume a second-order system with constant coefficients:

M ẋ˙ + C ẋ + Kx = F ( t ) ,
Put this into a state space formulation:

˙
M 0 ẋ + C K ẋ = F ( t )
0 M x –M 0 x 0

Each of the if the original problem has N degrees of freedom, the new
system has 2N degrees of freedom.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Change of Variables
Advanced Vibrations

Define = M 0 . Since M is nonsingular, so is .


0 M

Define y = ẋ , substitute the change of varibles into the state-space


x
–1
governing equation, and premultiply by toobtain

ẏ – Ay = F̃ where A = –
–1 C K and F̃ =
–1 F (t)
–M 0 0
We shall use modal analysis and orthogonality to solve the above first
order system.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Bi-Orthogonality
Advanced Vibrations

Because, the matrix A is non-symmetric its eigen vectors are not


orthogonal. They are not even real.

Because of the non-symmetry of A , we must talk about the right and


left eigen values of A.
• A right eigen pair of A is a solution ( λ, V ) that satisfies
AV = λV
• A left eigen pair of A is a solution ( λ, W ) that satisfies
H H H
W A = λW where ( ) is the complex conjugate
transpose of its arguement. Note that the left eigenvectors of A
T
are the right eigenvectors of A . Please verify this.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Several Useful Observations
Advanced Vibrations

• If ( λ, V ) is a right eigen pair of A , then so is ( λ∗, V ∗ ) . Try it!


Lets order these eigen solutions by absolute value of the
imaginary part (the frequency) placing .

• Similarly, if ( λ, W ) is a left eigen pair of A , then so is


( λ∗, W ∗ ) .
• If λ is a right eigen value of A , then it is also a left eigen value of
A . The arguement is as follows. If ( A – λI )V = 0 for a non-
trivial V then A – λI is singular, which implies not only that the
columns of A – λI are linearly dependent, but that the rows of
A – λI are also linearly dependent. The linear dependence of
the rows of A – λI means there is a linear combination of them
H
which is also zero: W ( A – λI ) = 0 . Lets order these eigen
solutions identically to the corresponding right eigen solutions.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
2/10/99 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Bi-Orthogoality
Advanced Vibrations

Though the right eigen vectors are not mutually orthogonal, the left
eigenvectors are also not mutually orthogonal, there is an
orthogonallity between members of the two sets.
For the sake of simplicity, for the moment, we assume that there are no
repeated eigenvalues.

Consider one right eigen solution ( A – λ n I )V n = 0 , and contract it


H
by Wm:
H H
W m AV n = λ n W m V n

Similarly, we consider the m’th left eigen solution and contract it by V n:


H H
W m AV n = λ m W m V n

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Bi-Orthogoality
Advanced Vibrations

H
Subtracting these two, we have 0 = ( λ n – λ m )W m V n
Since we had assumed that there are no repeated eigenvalues, we
H H
conclude that W m V n = 0 and W m AV n for n ≠ m .

If there are repeat eigenvalues, we select linear combinations of the


corresponding eigenvectors to achieve mutual bi-orthogonality among
those eigenvectors.

H H
We normalize the V n so that W n V n = 1 and W n AV n = λ n .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Solution of Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

2n
We postulate solutions y = ∑ ak ( t )Y k to the governing equation
k=1
H
ẏ – Ay = F̃ and contract by W m to obtain

H
ȧ m ( t ) – λ m a m ( t ) = W m F̃ ( t )
In principle this could be solved by Laplace transforms:

H
W m { F̃ } a m ( 0 )
{ a m } = ------------------------ + --------------- .
s – λm s – λm
Note that the initial values are found from orthogonality

H
am ( 0 ) = W m y(0) .
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
2/10/99 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Solution of Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

Lets let ( λ m′, V m′ ) be the eigen pair conjugate to ( λ m, V m ) :

λ m′ = λ m∗ and V m′ = V m∗

The modal coordinates associated with ( λ m′, V m′ ) are also solved by


Laplace transforms:

H H
W m′ { F̃ } W m′ y ( 0 )
{ a m′ } = ------------------------- + ---------------------
s – λ m′ s – λ m′

H ∗ H ∗
(W m ) { F̃ } (W m ) y(0)
= -------------------------------- + ----------------------------
s – λ m∗ s – λ m∗

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Solution of Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

Lets add the contributions of each of these terms to the solution

{ a m V m + a m′ V m′ } =

H H ∗
 m m
V W  V m W m
=  ----------------- +  ----------------- ( { F̃ } + y ( 0 ) )
 s – λ m   s – λ m′ 

Note that the right hand side of the above equation is real. The complex
modes contribute to the solution pair-wise as real values.

We reclaim the solution to the physical problem from


ẋ = y .
x

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


2/10/99 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture14_5.frm
Lecture 15
Advanced Vibrations

TODAY

Last Word on Modal Analysis


Frequency Domain Analysis

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
A Last Word on Modal Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

Why modal analysis is attractive


• modal coordinates can be integrated independently.

• Model reduction by modal truncation:

M < modes
x(t ) = ∑ βk ( t ) { Pk }
k=1
where { P k } is the k’th column of the modal matrix simplifies the
problem further and permits larger time steps in the integration.

• Vibration modes have intrinsic meaning. Modes and modal


frequencies tell us something more understandable about
structural response than do structural matrices

• Modes and modal frequencies can be measured and compared


with prediction. Model validation and system identification

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

We have already examined problems in the frequency domain when we


assumed that the applied loads were harmonic:

iωt
f ( t ) = Re { F 0 e }.
In what follows, we will admit cases where the load is a continuous sum
of harmonic inputs:

∫ Re { F ( ω )e
iωt
f (t) = } dω
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

We may also write this as


iωt
f (t) = F ( ω )e dω
–∞

where F ( ω ) has been defined a little differently than previously.

There is a constraint that F ( – ω ) = ( F ( ω ) )∗ .


Lets discuss why.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

If we can express the time domain function in terms of a frequency


domain function, can we reverse the process?

Yes, of course. Following is a formulation of the relations.

∞ ∞
1 – i ωt
∫ ∫
iωt
f ( t ) = ------ F ( ω )e dω & F (ω) = f ( t )e dt

–∞ –∞

Note that we rescaled F in the above by 2π and replaced ω with – ω .


There are several other conventions for the placement of the 2π term
and the minus sign. The above appears to be most common.
These relations can be derived from a limiting case of Fourier series or
from a single application of the Cauchy integral theorem.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis
An interesting but unimportant note
Advanced Vibrations

There is an interesting observation for fans of the Laplace transform.


Fourier transform pairs can be achieved from analytic Laplace
transforms where they exist:

∞ ∞
– i ωt
∫ ∫ [ f ( t )e
iωt iωt
F (ω) = f ( t )e dt = + f ( – t )e ] dt
–∞ 0

= (f) s = iω + (– f ) s = –i ω

This is interesting, but not used very often. The primary reason is that
one usually does not deal with analytic Fourier transforms.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Why?
Advanced Vibrations

Frequency domain analysis is most useful when comparison is to be


made with experiment or when connection is desired between
experiment and modal analysis. We shall see examples of each.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Governing Equation in Frequency Space
Advanced Vibrations

Our familiar governing equations are M ẋ˙ + C ẋ + Kx = f ( t ) .


The Fourier transform of this equation is

2
( – ω M + iωC + K )X ( ω ) = F ( ω )
Say we are interested in the displacement x I ( t ) of degree of freedom I
due to forces at degree of freedom J . At first look this would appear to
be a difficult relationship to find, but it turns out to be reasonably do-
able.
We diagonalize the governing equation via modal decomposition:
x ( t ) = Pβ ( t ) which is X ( ω ) = PB ( ω ) in frequency space.
T 2 T
P ( – ω M + iωC + K )PX ( ω ) = P F ( ω )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Governing Equation in Frequency Space
Advanced Vibrations

T 2 T
P ( – ω M + iωC + K )PB ( ω ) = P F ( ω ) becomes

2 T
( – ω I + i2ωχ + D )B ( ω ) = P F ( ω )
The terms of B can be solved individually:
DOFs


2 2
Bk = P Jk F J ( ω ) ⁄ ( ω k – ω + 2iωζ k )
J=1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Frequency Response Functions
Advanced Vibrations

The displacement at node I is


Modes
XI (ω) = ∑ P Ik B k ( ω )
k=1
Modes DOFs

∑ ∑
2 2
= P Ik P Jk F J ( ω ) ⁄ ( ω k – ω + 2iωζ k )
k=1 J=1

DOFs
= ∑ H IJ ( ω )F J ( ω )
J=1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Frequency Response Functions
Advanced Vibrations

Above,

Modes


2 2
H IJ ( ω ) = P Ik P Jk ⁄ ( ω k – ω + 2iωζ k )
k=1

is the “receptance frequency response function” of DOF I with respect


to DOF J . Sometimes it is simply called the “frequency response
function”.

By construction, we see that all of the frequency response functions for


a single structure share the same peaks when plotted against
frequency.

Lets discuss what this means for experimental modal


analysis.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Modal Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

Having found the resonances of the system by identification of the


peaks in the frequency response functions, we consider the following
experiment:

We excite the structure at a single point J at a natural frequency ω k


and measure the displacements (or accelerations) at a good number of
sample of points elsewhere on the structure

2 2
H IJ ( ω ) ≅ P Ik [ P Jk ⁄ ( ω k – ω + 2iωζ k ) ]
We see that at resonance, the receptance at locations is proportional to
the mode shape of that frequency. It is possible to assess the mode
shapes experimentally.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Frequency Domain Analysis:
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
Advanced Vibrations

H IJ ( ω ) = X I ( ω ) ⁄ F J ( ω ) , and we will often want to


By definition,
determine H IJ ( ω ) experimentally. What candidate forces can be
used? Most commonly used are:
• stepped sine
• swept sine

• impulse

• random

Each approach has its advantages. Lets look at them individually

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
By Stepped Sine
Advanced Vibrations

Stepped sine experiments are usually done by connecting a part of the


structure to a shaker via a thin wire or rod (a stringer). Accelerometers
placed at the appropriate locations on the structure provide the
kinematic information in frequency space.

Stinger or Stringer

Force Transducer
Leads to a myriad
accelerometers
Shaker
Charge Amplifier &
Signal Processor
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
By Stepped Sine
Advanced Vibrations

Stepped sine testing is usually done so that the structure reaches


steady state at each frequency before moving on to the next frequency.
A sine force input of unit peak amplitude is

iω 0 t – iω 0 t
e –e
f ( t ) = sin ω 0 t = ----------------------------- .
2i

1 – i ωt
Since f ( t ) = ------
2π ∫ F ( ω )e dω ,
–∞

F ( ω ) = πi [ δ ( ω – ω 0 ) – δ ( ω + ω 0 ) ]

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
By Stepped Sine
Advanced Vibrations

Recalling that H IJ ( ω ) = X I ( ω ) ⁄ F J ( ω ) and noting that the only


information available from this experiment is at ω 0 and – ω 0 , we have

H IJ ( ω 0 ) = X ( ω 0 ) ⁄ ( πi ) and H IJ ( – ω 0 ) = X ( ω 0 )∗ ⁄ ( – π i ) .

Note that H IJ ( – ω 0 ) = H IJ ∗ ( ω 0 ) . This means that H IJ ( ω ) is the


Fourier transform of a Real function.
Can we guess which one?

The advantage of stepped sine experiments is that they provide high


resolution of both phase and amplitude of H IJ ( ω )

The disadvantage is that it takes much more time.


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
By Swept Sine Input
Advanced Vibrations

Swept sine input is much more quickly implemented than is the stepped
sine input.
This sort of experiment is most often used to search for resonances.
Unless the sweep is very slow, the results are hard to post process for
detailed information.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
By Impulse Hammer
Advanced Vibrations

The impulse hammer contains a precision force transducer at its tip so


that the force history at the interval of impact can be recorded
accurately. The frequency content of the impulse extends roughly to the

reciprocal of the period of the pulse. The frequency content can be


concentrated at low frequencies by softening the tip and by increasing
the mass of the hammer head. Conversely, the frequency content can
be extended up to higher frequencies by dropping the mass and raising
the stiffness.
The frequency content of the structural response will cover roughly the
same interval.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
By Impulse Hammer
Advanced Vibrations

In principle, the frequency response can be assessed by evaluating the


Fourier transforms of the impulse and the response and taking the
ratio.

H IJ ( ω ) = X I ( ω ) ⁄ F J ( ω )
Signals are reinforced by doing several experiments and averaging the
frequency response functions obtained from each.
Note that the magnitude information on the frequency response
function can be calculated from power spectra of the input and output:

[ H IJ ( ω )F J ( ω ) ] [ H IJ ( ω )F J ( ω ) ]∗ = X I ( ω )X I ( ω )∗ yielding

H IJ ( ω ) = S XX ( ω ) ⁄ S FF ( ω )

where S XX ( ω )= X I ( ω )X I ( ω )∗ is the power spectral density (PSD)


of displacement and S FF ( ω ) = F J ( ω )F J ( ω )∗ is the PSD of force.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
Via Random Input
Advanced Vibrations

Random input experiments offer the opportunity to collect data rich in


frequency content. Further, those experiments can be run over a long
period of time to over acquiring a good signal-to-noise ratio.
We consider stationary random excitations. These are processes
whose probability distributions are constant in time. Following is a plot
of a probability density distribution of values of f J determined from a
population collected over a large time window. Stationary asserts that
the shape of this curve does not change as the sampling window is
translated in time.

ρ( f J )

fJ
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
Via Random Input
Advanced Vibrations

Define the auto-correlation integral for the imposed force:



u ff ( τ ) = ∫ f J ( t ) f J ( t + τ ) dt . Because the distribution of f J is
–∞
stationary, u ff ( τ ) is well defined (does not change with a change of
variable s = t + α ). Similarly, because the system is linear and time-
translation invariant, the auto-correlation integral u xx ( τ ) for the system
response at location I is well defined as well.


The cross-correlation integral is u xf ( τ ) = ∫ x I ( t ) f J ( t + τ ) dt .
–∞
Note that these infinite integrals should average away much of the
noise in the system. Further, if the excitation is also ergodic, we can
average the correlation integrals for multiple experiments.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
Via Random Input
Advanced Vibrations

In summary, the auto-correlation and cross-correlations can be


collected and averaged in various ways to maximize the signal-to-noise.
The Fourier transforms of these integrals have interesting form:

∞ ∞ ∞ iωτ

∫ ∫ ∫e
iωτ
U xf ( ω ) = e u xf ( τ ) dτ = x I ( t ) f J ( t + τ ) dt dτ
–∞ –∞ –∞
∞ ∞ iωτ
= ∫ xI ( t ) ∫ e f J ( t + τ ) dτ dt
–∞ –∞

– i ωτ
= ∫e x I ( τ ) dτ F J ( ω ) = X I ( ω )∗ F J ( ω )
–∞

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
Via Random Input
Advanced Vibrations

Because our integrals are actually over finite time, we use the expected
value of the right hand side.

S XF ( ω ) = E { U xf ( ω ) } = E { X I ( ω )∗ F J ( ω ) } .
where the expected value is obtained by averaging over a number of
tests. The uncertainty in the expected value is a function of the number
of averages. S XF ( ω ) is the cross-spectral density of X I and F J .

Note that S XF = S FX ∗ .

Similarly,

S XX ( ω ) = E { X I ( ω )∗ X I ( ω ) } & S FF ( ω ) = E { F J ( ω )∗ F J ( ω ) }

are power spectral densities of XI and FJ .


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Experimental Determination of H IJ ( ω )
Via the Time Domain
Advanced Vibrations

Contracting the equation

X I ( ω ) = H IJ ( ω )F J ( ω )
on both sides by the appropriate quantity Fourier transformed quantity,
we see that we could as easily evaluate

H IJ ( ω ) = S FX ( ω ) ⁄ S FF ( ω ) and H IJ ( ω ) = S XX ( ω ) ⁄ S XF ( ω )

These equations offer two distinct estimates of H IJ ( ω ) from


experimental data. The ratio of these two estimates is the coherence

2 2
γ ( ω ) = S FX ( ω ) ⁄ ( S FF ( ω )S XX ( ω ) )
2
Unless γ is nearly 1.0, the estimate for H IJ ( ω ) is considered
unreliable.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

Clay Fulcher will demonstrate how modal and frequency response are
uses to assess reliability of critical structures.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture15.frm
Lecture 16
Advanced Vibrations

Over the next few weeks, we shall address the vibration of continuous
structure.
• We shall begin deriving the governing equations for idealized
structures such as strings, rods, Euler-Bernoulli beams,
Timoshenko beams, and plates. We shall do this exploiting
D’Alembert’s principle and Hamilton’s principle.

• Where possible, we shall derive closed form solutions to


dynamics of these structures in terms of eigenmodes.

• We shall explore approximate solutions to these structures.

• If time permits, we shall begin an examination of waves.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings
Advanced Vibrations

Strings are a good place to begin the process of deriving governing


equations and closed-form solutions.

Strings are one-dimensional structures too thin to exhibit bending


stiffness. Tension in the string serves to drive it toward the equilibrium
configuration - a straight line.
Lets draw a free-body diagram and derive governing equations.

The tension on the string is


F( x) p( x) F ( x + dx ) F ( x ) , the density of the
string isρ ( x ) , and the
distributed load is p ( x )
y' ( x ) ρ( x) y' ( x + dx )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings
Advanced Vibrations

We balance the vertical


component of force to find

ρ ( x )ẏ˙( x ) = ( F ( x )y′ ( x ) )′ F( x) p( x) F ( x + dx )
+ p ( x, t ) .
y' ( x ) ρ( x) y' ( x + dx )
In what follows, we shall assume
that F ( x ) = F = Constant
& that ρ ( x ) = ρ = Constant .
We choose easy boundary conditions: y ( 0, t ) = y ( L, t ) = 0 .
Lets now solve the unforced initial value problem:

ρẏ˙( x ) = ( Fy′ ( x ) )′
subject to y ( x, 0 ) = y 0 ( x ) and ẏ ( x, 0 ) = v 0 ( x )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings
Advanced Vibrations

Lets solve ρẏ˙( x ) = ( Fy′ ( x ) )′ by separation of variables


y ( x, t ) = ∑ X n ( x )T n ( t )
n

Ṫ˙n F X n ′′ 2
This yields ------ = --- ---------- = – λ n for each n .
Tn ρ Xn


Solving X n ′′ + λ n --- X n = 0 , subject to X n ( 0 ) = X n ( L ) = 0 , we
F
find that


2
nπx
X n = sin ---------  nπ
and ------ = λ n ---
L  L F

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings
Advanced Vibrations

 nπ
2
2ρ nπ  F 1 ⁄ 2
------ = λ n --- => λ n = ± ------ --- .
 L F L  ρ
2
The temporal part of the solution is the solution to T n + λ n T n = 0
˙˙
which has solutions T n ( t ) = A n cos ( λ n t ) + B n sin ( λ n t )

The solution to the problem is

∑ n
nπx
y ( x, t ) = ( A cos ( λ n t ) + B n sin ( λ n t ) ) sin ---------
n
L
The velocity of the string is

∑ n n
nπx
ẏ ( x, t ) = λ ( – A sin ( λ n t ) + B n cos ( λ n t ) ) sin ---------
n
L
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings
Advanced Vibrations

Lets match initial conditions.

∑ n --------
nπx
From prescribed initial position, y0 ( x ) = A sin -
n
L

∑ n n --------
nπx
From prescribed initial velocity, v 0 ( x ) = λ B sin -.
n
L

We use these to solve for the coefficients by exploiting the


orthogonality of sine and cosine.

L L
2 nπx 2 nπx
A n = --- ∫ y 0 ( x ) sin --------- dx & B n = --------- ∫ v 0 ( x ) sin --------- dx
L L λn L L
0 0
Please confirm these. Which is the fundamental tone?
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Advanced Vibrations

Note that we could have posed this in terms of kinetic energy and
potential energy operators.

∂ ∂ 
Let K be the differential operator K [ y ] = – F (y) and we
∂x ∂x 

consider its operation only on the linear space of smooth functions that
satisfy the geometric boundary conditions ( y ( 0, t ) = y ( L, t ) = 0 ).

K is a symmetric (self adjoint) operator is that


( y 1, K y 2 ) = ( K ( y 1 ), y 2 ) where ( a, b ) is the inner product of
L
functions a and b . In the case of the string, ( a, b ) = ∫ a ( x )b ( x ) dx .
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Advanced Vibrations

We prove that K is a self-adjoint operator directly.


L
 – ∂  T ∂ (y )  dx
( y 1, K y 2 ) = ∫ 1  ∂ x ∂ x 2  
y ( x )
0
L
∂ ∂  ∂y 1 ∂y 2
= ∫ –
∂x 
y 1 ( x )T (y 2) + T
∂x  ∂x ∂x
dx
0
0 L
∂ L ∂y 1 ∂y 2
= y 1 ( x )T (y 2) + ∫T dx
∂x 0 ∂x ∂x
0
L
∂y 2 ∂y 1
= ∫T dx = ( Ky 1, y 2 )
∂x ∂x
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Advanced Vibrations

It is also easily seen that K is a positive definite operator


L
∂y ∂y
( y, Ky ) = ∫T ∂ x∂ x
dx > 0 for all non-trivial y ( x ) .
0

We define the mass operator My ( x ) = ρy ( x ) .


It is obvious that M is symmetric: ( y 1, M y 2 ) = ( M y 1, y 2 ) ,

and that M is positive definite: ( y, My ) > 0 for all non-trivial y ( x ) .

The governing equation now has the form M ẏ˙ + Ky = 0 . Except for a
sign difference, this looks similar to the matrix equations for discrete
systems.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Eigenmodes For Continuous Systems
Advanced Vibrations

Lets define U 0 to be the set of twice differentiable functions X defined


in [ 0, L ] that satisfy the boundary conditions at 0 and L .

2 ( X , KX )
We consider the functional λ ( X ) : λ ( X ) = --------------------- operating on
( X , MX )
functions in X ∈ U0,

2 2
Let λ = min λ ( X ) and let X 1 be the function that achieves that
1
X ∈ U0
minimum.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Eigenmodes For Continuous Systems
Advanced Vibrations

2 2
Let U 1 = { X ∈ U 0 : ( X , M X 1 ) = 0 } and let λ 2 = min λ ( X )
X ∈ U1
and let X 2 be the function that achieves that minimum.

One continues in this manner:

defining U n = { X ∈ U n – 1 : ( X , M X n ) = 0 } and letting


2 2
λ n + 1 = min λ ( X ) and X n + 1 be the function that achieves that
X ∈ Un
minimum.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Eigenmodes For Continuous Systems
Advanced Vibrations

Lets examine the character of the solutions to this optimization


problem.

d ( ( X 1 + αX̃ ), K ( X 1 + αX̃ ) )
Examine ----------------------------------------------------------------- = 0 where X̃ ( x ) is
d α ( ( X 1 + αX̃ ), M ( X 1 + αX̃ ) )
α=0
any function of x satisfying the boundary conditions.
2
Appropriate differentiation shows that ( X̃ , K X 1 – λ 1 M X 1 ) = 0 for
2
all X̃ . This implies that K X 1 – λ 1 M X 1 = 0 . ( λ 1, X 1 ) are and eigen
pair for the governing equation.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Eigenmodes For Continuous Systems
Advanced Vibrations

d ( ( X n + αX̃ ), K ( X n + αX̃ ) )
Similarly, Examine ----------------------------------------------------------------- = 0 where
d α ( ( X n + αX̃ ), M ( X n + αX̃ ) )
α=0
X̃ ( x ) is any function of x satisfying the boundary conditions and
orthogonal to the previous eigen functions.

2
Appropriate differentiation shows that ( X̃ , K X n – λn M X n ) = 0 for
all X̃
orthogonal to the previous eigen-functions. This implies that
2
K X n – λ n M X n = 0 . ( λ n, X n ) are and eigen pair for the governing
equation.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Orthogonality of Eigen function
Advanced Vibrations

We examine orthogonality in the same way that we did for discrete


systems.

Say that ( λ m, X m ) and ( λ n, X n ) are eigen pairs with distinct eigen


values: λ n ≠ λ m . We examine the following inner products:

2
( X m, K X n ) – λ n ( X m, M X n ) = 0 and
2
( X n, K X m ) – λ m ( X n, M Xm) = 0.

2 2
Subtracting one from another, we find ( λ n – λ m ) ( X n, M X m ) = 0 .

Eigen functions of distinct eigenvalues are orthogonal w.r.t. M.


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Orthogonality of Eigen function
Advanced Vibrations

2
( X m, K X n ) – λ n ( X m, M X n ) = 0 and
2
( X n, K X m ) – λ m ( X n, M X m ) = 0

Similarly, if the eigenvalues are distinct, we multiply the first of the


2 2
equations by λ m and the second by λ n and then subtract to find
2 2
( λ n – λ m ) ( X n, K X m ) = 0 .

Eigen functions of distinct eigenvalues are orthogonal w.r.t. K.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Positive Operators
Orthogonality of Eigen function
Advanced Vibrations

What happens if there are repeated eigenvalues.


• The above proof shows that the corresponding eigen functions
can be made orthogonal to eigen functions of all other
eigenvalues

• The eigen functions of the repeated eigenvalues can be


combined in such a way as to make them orthogonal. We shall
see some examples with beam bending.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Eigenvalues
Advanced Vibrations

nπx
By the way, we see that X n = sin --------- is the n’th eigen function of
L
2
( K – λ M )X = 0 , where KX = – ( FX′ ) ′ and MX = ρX and the
2 F  nπ 2
corresponding eigen value is λ n = --- ------ .
ρ L 
Note that frequency increases with tension, decreases with density, and
decreases with length.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Energy
Advanced Vibrations

By inspection, the kinetic energy is


L
ρ 1
T ( t ) = --- ∫ ( ẏ ( x, t ) ) dx = --- ( ẏ, M ẏ ) .
2
2 2
0

Lets also note that the potential energy is


L
F 1
V ( t ) = --- ∫ ( y′ ( x, t ) ) dx = --- ( y, Ky )
2
2 2
0
The equivalence of the above integral and inner product was
established in slide Strings and Positive Operators on page 8. That this
is the strain energy is shown next.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and Energy
Advanced Vibrations

Lets consider the experiment where the string is pulled through a pulley
at the boundary.

The distance that the string must be pulled through the pulleys in order
to stretch the string into its deformed shape is the arc length of the
curved string minus the distance between the boundaries

L L
1 2
∫ 1 + y′ dx – L ≅ --- ∫ y′ dx
2
d =
2
0 0

L
F 2
and the work involved is W = Fd = --- ∫ y′ dx .
2
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and the Rayleigh Quotient
Advanced Vibrations

2 ( X , KX )
The quotient that we were examining before, λ ( X ) = ---------------------
( X , MX )
actually reflects the energy in periodic motion.

iωt
Say that the deformation is y ( x, t ) = Re { e }X ( x ) . Then
iωt
ẏ = Re { iωe }X ( x ) . The maximum kinetic energy in a cycle is
L
ρ iωt 2 1

2
max --- ẏ ( x, t ) dx = max ( Re { iωe } ) --- ( X , MX )
2π 2 2π 2
0 < t < ------ 0 0 < t < ------
ω ω
1 2
= --- ω ( X , MX )
2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and the Rayleigh Quotient
Advanced Vibrations

1
Similarly, the maximum strain energy in each cycle is --- ( X , KX ) .
2

2 2 ( X , KX )
We now see that λ n = ω n = --------------------- is the ratio of maximum
( X , MX )
strain energy in a mode to the maximum kinetic energy in that mode.

( X , KX )
2
The function λ ( X ) = --------------------- is called the Rayleigh quotient and
( X , MX )
is often used to obtain upper bounds for the first natural frequency.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Strings and the Rayleigh Quotient
Advanced Vibrations

Lets see how well f ( x ) = x ( L – x ) approximates the first eigen


function:

∫ F ( f′ ( x ) ) dx
2
3
2 FL ⁄ 3 F
λ ( f ) = --------------------------------
0
L
- = ------------------
5
- = 10 --------
-
2
ρL ⁄ 30 ρL
∫ ρ ( f ( x ) ) dx
2

This is not to far from the exact solution


2
2 πx π F F
λ sin ------ = ---------2- = 9.87 2-
--------
 L ρL ρL

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 22 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Derivation of String Equations
via Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

We derived the equation of motion for the string via a straightforward


application of D’Alemberts principle (balancing force and inertial
terms). Lets try it now with Hamilton’s principle.

The Weak form of Hamilton’s Principle: asserts that the actual path is
t2

one about which


∫ ( δT – δV + δW ) dt = 0 . Here, δW is the virtual
t1
work of external forces pushing the system from one path in
configuration space to another.

Lets first ignore all external forces.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 23 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Derivation of String Equations
via Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

t2

0 = ∫ ( δT – δV ) dt
t 2t 1 L t2 L
ρ 2  F 2 
= δ ∫ ---  ∫ ( ẏ ( x, t ) ) dx dt – δ ∫ ---  ∫ ( y′ ( x, t ) ) dx dt
2  2 
t 1 0 t 10
L t2 t2 L

= ∫∫ ∂t
( ρẏδy ) – ρẏ˙δy dt dx – ∫ ∫ F [ ( y′δy )′ – y′′δy ] dx dt
0 t1 t1 0
L 0 t2 0
t2 t2
= ∫ ( ρẏδy ) t dx – ∫ ( F ( y′δy ) t ) dt
1 1
L t2
0 t1
 
– ∫  ∫ [ ρẏ˙ – Fy′′ ]δy dt dx

0 t

1
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 24 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

A little more on Strings


Rods

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 25 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture16.frm
Lecture 17
Rods and More Strings
Advanced Vibrations

These are 1-dimensional structures.


• With rods, only longitudinal deformation is considered.

• With strings, only lateral motions were considered.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
A More Complicated String Problem
Deformations in Two Dimensions
Advanced Vibrations

We studied the string vibrating in a plane earlier. Lets now consider a


string that can move in either of two lateral directions.

y ( x, t ) = u ( x, t ) j + v ( x, t )k
Further, we consider a more complicated boundary condition.
j
k

We restrict the left hand end of the string to move within a track in the

vertical direction: y ( 0, t ) = s ( t ) j (=> v ( 0, t ) = 0 ).


The string is pinned on the right-hand-side:

y ( L, t ) = 0 (=> u ( L, t ) = v ( L, t ) = 0 ).
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
A More Complicated String Problem
Deformations in Two Dimensions
Advanced Vibrations

We also consider a distributed load p ( x, t ) .


Again, we employ Hamilton’s principle. We shall need each of the terms
t2

in 0 = ∫ ( δT – δV + δW ) dt .
t1

L L
1 ˙ ˙ 1
T = --- ∫ ρy ( x, t ) • y ( x, t ) dt , V = --- ∫ F y′ ( x, t ) • y′ ( x, t ) dt , and
2 2
0 0

L
δW = ∫ p ( x, t ) • δy ( x, t ) dt
0

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
A More Complicated String Problem
Deformations in Two Dimensions
Advanced Vibrations

t2 t2 L
 ˙ ˙ 
∫ δT dt = ∫  ∫ ρy ( x, t ) • δy ( x, t ) dx dt
t1 t 0 1

L t2
 ∂ ˙ ˙˙ 
= ∫∫ ( ρy • δy ) – ρy • δy dt dx
 ∂t 
0 t 1

L 0 L t2
˙ t2  ˙˙ 
= ∫ ( ρy • δy ) t 1 dx – ∫  ∫ ρy • δy dt dx
0

0 t

1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
A More Complicated String Problem
Deformations in Two Dimensions
Advanced Vibrations

t2 t2 L
 
∫ δV dt = ∫  ∫ F y′ ( x, t ) • δy′ ( x, t ) dx dt
t1 t 0 1

t2 L
 ∂ 
= ∫ ∫ F ( y′ • δy ) – F y′′ • δy dt dx
 ∂x 
t 0 1

t2 L t2
L  
= ∫ ( F y′ • δy ) 0 dt – ∫  ∫ F y′′ • δy dt dx
 
t1 0 t1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
A More Complicated String Problem
Deformations in Two Dimensions
Advanced Vibrations

L t2
 ˙˙ 
∫∫
We put this all together to find:  [ F y′′ – ρy + p ] • δy dt d x = 0

0 t 1

˙˙
for all δy from which we deduce that ρy = F y′′ + p <=>

ρu̇˙ = Fu′′ + p • j and ρv̇˙ = Fv′′ + p • k

t2
L
Also,
∫ ( F y′ • δy ) 0 dt = 0 from which we conclude that
t1
t2

∫ F y′ ( 0, t ) • δy ( 0, t ) dt = 0 => y′ ( 0, t ) • ( δs j ) => u′ ( 0, t ) = 0
t1
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
A More Complicated String Problem
Deformations in Two Dimensions
Advanced Vibrations

We have two independent partial differential equations with their own


boundary conditions:

ρu̇˙ = Fu′′ + p ( x, t ) • j subject to u′ ( 0, t ) = 0 & u ( L, t ) = 0


and

ρv̇˙ = Fv′′ + p ( x, t ) • k subject to v ( 0, t ) = 0 & v ( L, t ) = 0

We shall discuss how to solve these equations later in this lecture.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Governing Equations for Rods
By Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

F0 FL
x
u ( x, t )

We consider a rod of length L , cross sectional area A , density ρ , and


Young’s modulus E . We wish to derive a governing equation for this.
We shall use Hamilton’s Principle.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Governing Equations for Rods
By Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

Recall: The Weak form of Hamilton’s Principle: asserts that the actual
t2

path is one about which


∫ ( δT – δV + δW ) dt = 0 . Here, δW is the
t1
virtual work of external forces pushing the system from one path in
configuration space to another.
Lets enumerate the components of the above equation:

L L
 ∂u 2
∂u 2
, T = --- ρA   d x ,
1 1
V = --- ∫ EA
2 ∫ ∂t 
dx
2  ∂x
0 0
and

δW = – F 0 δu ( 0, t ) + F L δu ( L, t )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Governing Equations for Rods
By Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

For the rod, Hamilton’s principle becomes


t2

0 = ∫ ( δT – δV + δW ) dt
t1
t2 L t2 L
   
= ∫  ∫ ρAu̇δu̇ dx dt – ∫  ∫ EAu′δu′ dx dt

t 0
 
t 0

1 1
t2

+ ∫ ( – F 0 ( t )δu ( 0, t ) + F L ( t )δu ( L, t ) ) dt
L t2 t1 t2 L
 ∂ [ u̇δu ] – u̇˙δu dt dx – EA  ∂ [ u′δu ] – u′′δu dx dt
= ∫ ∫ ∂t
ρA

t2
∫ ∫ ∂x 
0 t1 t1 0
+ ∫ ( – F 0 ( t )δu ( 0, t ) + F L ( t )δu ( L, t ) ) dt
t1
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Governing Equations for Rods
By Hamilton’s Principle
Advanced Vibrations

After some re-organization, this becomes

L 0 L t2
t2
0 = ∫ ( ρAu̇δu ) t dx – ∫ ∫ ( ρAu̇˙ – EAu′′ )δu dt dx
1
0 0 t1
t2 t2

– ∫ ( EAu′δu ) 0 dt + ∫ [ – F 0 ( t )δu ( 0, t ) + F L ( t )δu ( L, t ) ] dt


L

t1 t1

From which we conclude that ρAu̇˙ – EAu′′ , that


[ EAu′ ( L, t ) – F L ( t ) ]δu ( L, t ) = 0 and that

[ EAu′ ( 0, t ) – F 0 ( t ) ]δu ( 0, t ) = 0 .
Hamilton’s principle provides governing equations and form of B.C.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

Say we have a specific problem. Our rod is fixed on one end and subject
to a prescribed load on the other.

F (t)
x
u ( x, t )

L
We shall try to solve this using a modal solution, but first, we must find
the modes.

We consider the unforced beam and solve ρAu̇˙ – EAu′′ = 0 subject


to the boundary conditions: u ( 0, t ) = 0 & u′ ( L, t ) = 0 .

From where does the second B.C. come?


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

iωt
We postulate solutions u ( x, t ) = Re ( Ce )X ( x ) . This yields the
2
2 2 ω ρ
equation for X : X′′ + λ X = 0 where λ = ---------- .
E
The only solutions to the above equation with the specified boundary

 π ( 2n – 1 ) x 
conditions are X n ( x ) = α n sin ----------------------- --- .
 2 L

Note that, as expected, ( X m, M X n ) = 0 for m ≠ n .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Mass Normalization
Advanced Vibrations

Lets choose the constants α n so that the modes are orthonormal with
respect to the mass matrix. ( X m, M X n ) = δ mn requires that

2 2  π ( 2n – 1 ) x 
αn = ------- so that X n( x) = ------- sin ----------------------- --- .
Lρ Lρ  2 L

Please confirm that this normalization is correct.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

Lets now make a change of variables to discretize the problem.

N
Assume that u ( x, t ) = ∑ f n ( t )X n ( x )
n=1
Let now derive our governing equations in terms of our new variables
f n ( t ) using Lagrange equations. (Lagrange has been a good friend to
us.)

L N N
1   
T = --- ∫ ρA  ∑ f m ( t )X m ( x )  ∑ f n ( t )X n ( x ) dx
˙ ˙
2
0
m = 1  n = 1 
N N L N
1  1
= ---  ∑ ∑ f m ( t ) f n ( t ) ∫ ρAX m ( x )X n ( x ) dx = --- ∑ f n ( t )
2
˙ ˙ ˙
2  2
m = 1n = 1 0 n=1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

The potential energy is a little more complicated:

L N N
1   
V = --- ∫ EA  ∑ f m ( t )X m ′ ( x )  ∑ f n ( t )X n ′ ( x ) dx
2
0
m = 1  n = 1 
N N L
1 
= --- 
2 ∑ ∑ f m ( t ) f n ( t ) ∫ EAX m ′ ( x )X n ′ ( x ) dx
m = 1n = 1 0
N
1  π EA
2
 ∑ n f n(t )
2 2
= ---  -------------
2  ρL  2
n=1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

The generalized force associated with each mode calculated from the
work done by the physical forces against each mode:

X X
δW n = δfn X n ( L )F ( t ) = δfn Q n ( t ) => Q n(t ) = X n ( L )F ( t )

The constituents of the Lagrange equation are:

d  ∂T  ∂T ∂V  π 2 EA 2
– = f˙˙n , – = –  -------------n fn
 
d t ∂ f˙n ∂ f n ∂fn  ρL  2

The Lagrange equations for this system are:

 π 2 EA 2 2  π ( 2n – 1 )
f n = –  -------------
˙˙  n f n + F ( t ) ------- sin  -----------------------
 ρL  2 Lρ 2
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

The forcing term simplifies a little bit:

 π 2 EA 2 2 n
f˙˙n = –  ------------- n f n – F ( t ) ------
- ( – 1 )
 ρL  2 Lρ

We might solve this by Laplace transform methods or


we might solve this by numerical integration.

Having found a sufficient number of the f n ( t ) , we can reconstitute the


N
physical solution from u ( x, t ) = ∑ f n ( t )X n ( x ) .
n=1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Modal Solutions for Rods
Advanced Vibrations

To re-cap:
• Having identified the potiential and kinetic energy, we can use
Hamilton’s principle to deduce the governing equations.

• Modal solutions are found to the unforced problem

• Mode shapes are used to discretize the problem and can be used
to introduce generalized degrees of freedom in solving the forced
vibration problem.

• Using modal coordinates diagonalizes the problem for us.

Please think about how we could introduce damping into this analysis.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Next Time
Advanced Vibrations

Numerical Solutions for Strings and Rods


Galerkin Method
We saw how we could use the eigen functions to convert the partial
differential equations into systems of ordinary differential equations
that could be solved by

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture17.frm
Lecture 18: Numerical Methods
Advanced Vibrations

Numerical Solutions for Rods


Galerkin Method
We saw how we could use the eigen functions to convert the partial
differential equations into systems of ordinary differential equations
that could be solved by expressing the displacement field a a linear
combination of eigen modes.
Application of the Lagrange equations resulted in a system of ordinary
differential equations in time - one equation per modal coefficient.

In this lecture, we discuss the solution of vibration problems when we


do not have a closed-form expression for the eigen modes. There are
two general approaches
• numerical solution to approximate the eigen functions

• solution for displacements with going through eigen analysis

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Numerical Solution For Eigen Functions
Advanced Vibrations

Say that we have a problem for which we cannot calculate closed form
eigen functions. One such problem is that pictured below where the

cross section is non-constant. We shall now expand the displacement


field in terms of assumed modes

u ( x, t ) = ∑ an ( t )Pn ( x ) ,
n
and then employ this expansion in creating the Lagrange equations.
The only requirements that we place on P n ( x ) are that each satisfy
what ever geometric boundary conditions exist.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

L
T ( t ) = --- ∫ ρA ( x )  ∑ ȧ m ( t )P m ( x )  ∑ ȧ n ( t )P n ( x ) dx
1
2   
0 m n

L
V ( t ) = --- ∫ EA ( x )  ∑ a m ( t )P m ′ ( x )  ∑ a n ( t )P n ′ ( x ) dx
1
2   
0 m n

and

δW = ∑ δan ( t )Pn ( L )F ( t ) = ∑ δan ( t )Qn


n n

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Governing Equations
Advanced Vibrations

We have done this derivation before. The following should be familiar.

d  ∂T  ∂V

d t ∂ ȧ m
+
∂ am
= ∑ M mn ȧ˙n + ∑ K mn an = Qm ( t )
n n

L
where K mn = ∫ EA ( x )Pm ′ ( x )Pn ′ ( x ) dx ,
0

L
M mn = ∫ ρA ( x )Pm ( x )Pn ( x ) dx , and
0

L
Qm ( t ) = ∫ Pm ( x )F ( x, t ) = P m ( L )F ( t )
0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Governing Equations
How to choose the P m
Advanced Vibrations

Criteria for choosing the assumed modes:


• linear combinations of the assumed modes must be able to take
on the admissible configurations of the problem. (They must
span the space.)

• it should not be too difficult to compute the generalized


coordinates and their time derivatives in terms of the initial
deformation and velocity of the structure.

Lets try some examples

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Example with polynomial shape functions
Advanced Vibrations

Consider a tapered rod having cross section distribution

A ( x ) = A 0  1 – ------
x
 2L

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Assumed Modes Case 1
Advanced Vibrations

n
Lets try the expansion defined by Pn ( x ) = ( x ⁄ L )
L
 1 – -----
x
∫ 0  2L
m n
M nm = ρ A - ( x ⁄ L ) ( x ⁄ L ) dx
0
ρ A0 L (m + n + 3)
= ------------- --------------------------------------------------------
2 (m + n + 1)(m + n + 2)
L
m+n–2
K mn
mn  x
= ------2- ∫ E A 0 1 – ------ ( x ⁄ L ) dx
 2L 
L 0
E A 0  ( mn ) ( m + n + 1 ) 
= ---------- ----------------------------------------------
2L  ( m + n – 1 ) ( m + n )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Assumed Modes Case 1
Advanced Vibrations

We have established that in this case, we can do the necessary


integrals.

The question remains: how to find initial values: a n ( 0 ) and ȧ n ( 0 ) ?.


The answer is through the use of Bernstein polynomials.

n
 k   n  x  k   x  n – k
B n ( y ( x, 0 ) ) = ∑ y L ---, 0 --- 1 – -- → y ( x, 0 )
 n   k  L   k 
0

n
 k   n  x  k   x  n – k
B n ( ẏ ( x, 0 ) ) = ∑ ẏ L ---, 0 --- 1 – -- → ẏ ( x, 0 )
 n   k  L   k 
0
We have established here that polynomials could be used to solve rod
problems. This approach is correct, but not very appealing.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Assumed Modes Case 2
Advanced Vibrations

Lets use the the chapeau functions as our assumed modes

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7

Each of these functions has


• a value of 1.0 on a single node,

• a non-zero value on a small region about its node (the support of


the shape function),

• and a value of zero on every other node.

The approximation for y ( x, t ) is y ( x, t ) = ∑ yn ( t )Pn ( x )


n
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Assumed Modes Case 2
Advanced Vibrations

Initial conditions are obtained by several alternate methods, the most


direct of which is collocation:

y n ( 0 ) = y ( x n, 0 ) and ẏ n ( 0 ) = ẏ ( x n, 0 )

L
 1 – -----
x
The integrals M nm = ∫ 0  2L- yn ( x )ym ( x ) dx and
ρ A
0
L
K nm  x
= ∫ E A 0 1 – ------ y n ( x )y m ( x ) dx are calculated by numerical
 2L
0
integration.

The integration need be performed only where the support of ym ( x )


intersects that of yn ( x )
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture18.frm
Lecture 19: Membranes
Formulations And Some Analytic Solutions
Advanced Vibrations

Membranes are two-dimensional systems which, at rest, will occupy the


configuration of minimum curvature consistent with the boundary
conditions. The restoring force of these membranes derives from an
isotropic surface tension.
In what follows, we assume that the boundaries lie entirely in a plane. In
this case, the membrane will also lie in a plane when at rest.
There are some cases for which it is possible to achieve closed form
solutions for the vibration of membranes. The best known of these are
those with rectangular or circular boundaries.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Governing Equations
Hamilton’s Principle Again
Advanced Vibrations

The only part of this problem which is not


immediately obvious is the calculation of
potential energy. We identify the strain
energy with the surface tension and the
surface area of the membrane. The strain
and kinetic energies and virtual work are:
1
∫ ∫A τ 1 + ∇w • ∇w d A T = --- ∫ ∫ ρẇ d A
2
V =
2 A

1
≈ ∫ ∫ τ 1 + --- ∇w • ∇w d A
A 2
δW = ∫ ∫A pδW d A
where w is the out-of-plane displacement of the membrane, F is the
surface tension in the membrane, ρ is the mass per unit area of the
membrane, and integration is over the area enclosed by the boundaries.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Governing Equations
Hamilton’s Principle Again
Advanced Vibrations

t2 ∂ t2 t2
0 = ∫ ∫ ∫ ρẇ δw d A – ∫ ∫ ∫ τ∇w • ∇δw d A + ∫ ∫ ∫ pδW d A
t1 A ∂t t1 t1 A

As usual, we must do an integration by parts with respect to time to



move the δw into δw and we must do an integration by parts
∂t
(Gauss’s theorem) with respect to the spacial coordinate to move the
∇δw into δw .
t2 ∂
0 = ∫t ∫ ∫A
1
ρ
∂t
( ẇδw ) – ẇ˙δw d A

t2
–∫ ∫ ∫A
2
τ [ ∇ • ( ∇wδw ) – ∇ wδw ] d A
t1
t2
+∫ ∫ ∫ pδW d A
t 1 A
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/7/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Governing Equations
Hamilton’s Principle Again
Advanced Vibrations

Evaluating the above and grouping like terms,

t2
∫t ∫ ∫A [ ρẇ˙ – τ∇
2
0 = w – p ]δw d A for all δw on A subject to
1
2
δw = 0 on ∂A . From the above, ρẇ˙ – τ∇ w – p = 0 on the
interior of A .

t2
Also,
∫t ∫∂A τ [ ∇w • n ]δw dΓ
1
= 0 where

the integral is over the boundary ∂A of A .


Here, n is a unit outward normal. This asserts
that at locations on the boundary for which w
∇w • n = 0 . In the following, we will consider only those
is not fixed,
case for which w is fixed on the boundaries.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Membrane Solutions on a Rectangle
Advanced Vibrations

In rectangular coordinates,
y
 ∂2 ∂
2
L2 τ  2 + 2  w + p ( x, y, t ) = ρẇ˙
∂x ∂y 
. Boundary conditions are
L1
w ( 0, y, t ) = w ( L 1, y, t ) = 0 and
x
w ( x, 0, t ) = w ( x, L 2, t ) = 0 .
Lets first try solving the homogeneous equation via separation of
variables (implying eigen analysis).

w ( x, y, t ) = ∑ f λ ( t )W λ ( x, y )
λ

2
∇ Wλ ρ fλ
˙˙
2
This leads to --------------- = --- ------ = – λ
Wλ τ fλ
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/7/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Rectangular Membrane Eigen Analysis
Advanced Vibrations

2 2 πmx πny
∇ W λ + λ W λ = 0 is satisfied by W λ = sin ----------- sin ---------
L1 L2

 πm 2  πn 2
2
We see that this works if λ = ------- + ------ . (we could have
 L1   L2 
derived the above by doing another separtation of variables:
W λ ( x, y ) = ∑ X λ ( x )Y λ ( y ) .)
Substituting back into our governing equation, we see that our eigen
πmx πny τ
solutions, Wλ = sin ----------- sin --------- , have frequency ω λ = --- λ
L1 L2 ρ

We shall exploit the mutual orthogonality of the eigenmodes. As usual,


we orthonormalize the modes: ( ρW λ , W λ ) = δ λ , λ .
1 2 1 2
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/7/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Forced Oscillation of Rectangular
Membranes
Advanced Vibrations

2
The governing equation is ρẇ˙ – τ∇ w – p ( x, y ) = 0 . Just as we
have done in the past, we express w ( x, y, t ) = ∑ f λ ( t )W λ ( x, y ) ,
λ
and derive Lagrange equations using the f λ(t ) as generalized
coordinates. After exploitation of the orthonormality, we have
independent equations for the modal coefficients:

τ 2
f˙˙λ + --- λ f = ( p ( x, y, t ), W λ )
ρ

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Eigenmodes on triangles
This would be a good assignment
Advanced Vibrations

Analytic solutions on other polygons are


harder. Lets consider the eigen problem on s = x+y–L
the right isosceles triangle shown.
y L

We might approximate the deformed shape of


the membrane on the triangle by the following
L
polynomials: x
W = xy ( x + y – L ) [ A 1 + A 2 x + A 3 y ]
= A 1 P 1 ( x, y ) + A 2 P 2 ( x, y ) + A 3 P 3 ( x, y )
We could use these basis functions to approximate the eigenmodes of a
membrane on this triangle.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Approximate Eigenmodes on triangles
Advanced Vibrations

W = A 1 P 1 ( x, y ) + A 2 P 2 ( x, y ) + A 3 P 3 ( x, y )
Lets set up the formulation to estimate the eigen shapes:

• The Lagrange equations are [ M ] { Ȧ˙} + [ K ] { A } = 0 where


M mn = ∫ ∫ ρP m P n d A and K mn = ∫ ∫ τ∇P m • ∇ P n d A
iωt
• Postulate a harmonic motion { A } = Re ( Ce { A0 } )
2
• Solve the resulting eigen problem ( – ω M + K ) { A 0 } = 0 for
1 2 3
three arrays { A }, { A }, { A }
• Construct the eigen shapes from
k k k
W k ( x, y ) = A 1 P 1 ( x, y ) + A 2 P 2 ( x, y) + A 3 P 3 ( x, y)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Vibration of Circular Membranes
Advanced Vibrations

2 2
2 ∂ 1∂ 1 ∂
In a circular domain, ∇ = + --- + ----2 2
∂r
2 r ∂r r ∂θ
We assume that there are no holes in the membrane, so the boundary
conditions are w ( R, θ, t ) = 0 .
Lets first try solving the homogeneous equation via separation of
variables (implying eigen analysis).

w ( r, θ, t ) = ∑ f λ ( t )W λ ( r, θ )
λ

2
∇ Wλ ρ fλ
˙˙
2
This leads to --------------- = --- ------ = – λ
Wλ τ fλ
(I hope that this looks very familiar to you.)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Vibration of Circular Membranes
Advanced Vibrations

2 2
∇ W λ + λ W λ = 0 is itself solved via a separation of variables:
W λ = R λ ( r )Θ λ ( θ ) . On substitution back into the differential
2

2
1 ∂R λ  ∂ Θ
R + ---  2
2 λ r ∂r
∂r 1 ∂θ  2
equation, we find ----------------------------------- + ---- --------------- + λ = 0
r Θ
Rλ 2

2
 ∂ Θ
from which we conclude that   ⁄Θ = C where C is a constant.
∂θ 
2

 ∂2 1 ∂R λ C 2
We also conclude that  R
2 λ
+ --
-  + ---- R λ + λ Rλ = 0 .
∂r r ∂r  r 2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Vibration of Circular Membranes
Advanced Vibrations

In order for the solution to make sense, Θ must be periodic in θ , so


2
2  ∂ Θ 2
C = – m and  2  + m Θ = 0 where m is any nonzero integer.
∂θ 
The solution to this equation, denoted as Θ m , is
Θ m ( θ ) = C 1m sin ( mθ ) + C 2m cos ( mθ ) .
The equation for the radial function is

 ∂2 1 ∂R λ m
2
2
 2 R λ, m + ---  – ------ R λ, m + λ R λ, m = 0 . This has solutions
∂r r ∂ r  r 2

R λ, m ( r ) = C 3m J m ( λr ) + C 4m Y m ( λr ) where J m is the Bessel


function of the first kind and order m and Y m is the Bessel function of
the second kind and order m .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Vibration of Circular Membranes
Advanced Vibrations

Note thatY m has a singularity about zero. If we have a membrane


without holes, then we must set C 4m = 0 .

We still must satisfy the boundary conditions that W ( R, θ ) = 0 . This


requires that J m ( λR ) = 0 . This condition is used to find λ .

This offers a large number of solutions. For each order, m , there is a


Bessel function of the first kind. That Bessel function has an infinite
number of zeros. Lets call the n th zero of the m th Bessel function
x m, n .
1 2
Then W ( r, θ ) = [ C m, n sin ( mθ ) + C m, n cos ( mθ ) ]J m ( λ m, n r ) is
an eigen mode where λ m, n = x m, n ⁄ R . Frequency is

ω m, n = τ ⁄ ρ λ m, n
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/7/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Vibration of Circular Membranes
Advanced Vibrations

Of course, we can use orthogonality in the usual manner to construct


solutions for given initial conditions and loads on the membrane.
It is interesting to see what these modes look like. Following is a plot of
the first and second Bessel functions of the first kind
1

0.5

3.832
3.832 7.106
7.106

2.405 5.520 8.654

−0.5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Lets look at the first eigen modes.


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/7/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
First Eigen Mode
J 0 ( 2.405r ) (first zero of J 0 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.5

−0.5
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Second Eigen Mode
J 1 ( 3.832r ) (first zero of J 1 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.5

−0.5

−1
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Third Eigen Mode
J 2 ( 5.136r ) (first zero of J 2 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.5

−0.5
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Fourth Eigen Mode
J 0 ( 5.520r ) (second zero of J 0 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.5

−0.5
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Fifth Eigen Mode
J 3 ( 6.380r ) (first zero of J 3 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.5

−0.5
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Sixth Eigen Mode
J 1 ( 7.016r ) (second zero of J 1 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.5

−0.5

−1
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Seventh Eigen Mode
J 4 ( 7.589r ) (first zero of J 4 )
Advanced Vibrations

0.4

0.2

−0.2

−0.4
1
0.8
0.6
1
0.4
0.2
0.5
0
−0.2 0
−0.4
−0.6 −0.5
−0.8
−1 −1

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/7/98 21 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/Lecture19.frm
Problem 1
Part 1
Advanced Vibrations

Part 1: For the system shown,


• Derive the governing equations of the system

• Linearize those equations about the state of stable equilibrium

R R R
M1 M1 M1
I1 I1 I1

L θ2 L θ3 L
θ1

k k
M2 M2 M2

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemD.frm
Problem 1
Part 2
Advanced Vibrations

Calculate the eigen modes and frequencies of the system, constrained


by two links, as shown below

R R R
M1 M1 M1
I1 I1 I1

L θ2 L θ3 L
θ1

k
M2 M2 M2

The top linkage is has a length equal to the distance between the
centers of the disks.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


11/30/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemD.frm
Problem 2
Advanced Vibrations

Consider the configuration


F(t) = F0 sin(ωt)
shown, assuming the beams
ΕΙ, m y 1 ( x, t ) deform as
2
y 1 ( x, t ) = A ( t ) ( x ⁄ L )
K and
y 2 ( x, t ) 2
ΕΙ, m y 2 ( x, t ) = B ( t ) ( x ⁄ L ) .
In this figure, EI is the
µ bending stiffness, m is mass
L
per unit length, K is spring
stiffness, and µ is the
coefficient of the damper shown.
In steady state harmonic excitation, we expect that
iωt iωt
A ( t ) = Re { A 0 e } and B ( t ) = Re { B 0 e } .

Calculate A 0 ⁄ F 0 and B 0 ⁄ F 0
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
11/30/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemD.frm
Problem E
A Damping Homework
Advanced Vibrations

We consider a structure such as that shown below


K
K
M M

A, h
u2 u1

We have two masses, two springs, and a shear damper.The cross


sectional area of the damper is A and the thickness of the damping
material is h . The damping material is that discussed earlier. For
6
M = 3 kg; K = 1.0 ×10 N/m; and A = 0.01 m2,
1. calculate the damping of both modes for h = 0.01 m
2. determine empirically the appropriate thickness, h, to make the
small modal damping as large as possible.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
The Damping Material
Advanced Vibrations

The following plot for polyisobutylene is taken from “Vibration


Damping” by Nashif et. al.

E’=3G’

tan(δ)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Interpolating Functions
Advanced Vibrations

ω 5
We can fit the above plots reasonably well in 0.1 < ------ < 10 by

ω 3.3
Log ( 3G' ( ω ) ) = Log ( E' ( ω ) ) = 6.2 + 0.0112  Log  ------  or
  2π 

  ω   3.3
5.72 + 0.0112 Log ------
  2π 
G' ( ω ) = 10 and

 ω   ω  2
Log ( tan δ ( ω ) ) = – 1 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ so
 2π   2π 

G'' ( ω ) = G' ( ω ) tan δ ( ω )


 ω   ω  2   ω   3.3
4.72 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ + 0.0112 Log ------
 2π   2π    2π 
= 10
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Solution
Using a lot of Matlab
Advanced Vibrations

The governing equation in frequency space is

= F (ω)
m 0
2 U1 K –K U1
–ω +
0 m U2 – K ( 2K + G∗ ( ω ) ( A ⁄ h ) ) U 2 0
where we are mimicking a driving force on mass 1.
1. We employ matlab to invert the above system to solve for the
driving point frequency response H 1(ω) = U 1(ω) ⁄ F (ω) .

2. We plot H 1(ω) versus ω (or f , it makes no difference. why?)


3. Find the peaks

∆ω
4. Determine fraction of critical damping for each mode via ζ = ---------
2ω n

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Results for h = 0.01 == A ⁄ h = 1.0
Advanced Vibrations

−5 Frequency Response of 2−Mass System with Damping


x 10
1.2

A/h = 1

0.8 zeta = 0.069727


|FRF| Mass 1

0.6
|H1|

0.4

0.2 |H2|

zeta = 0.098924
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Frequency Hz

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Results for h = 0.1 == A ⁄ h = 0.1
Advanced Vibrations

−5 Frequency Response of 2−Mass System with Damping


x 10
8

6 A/h = 0.1

|H1|
5 zeta = 0.013697
|FRF| Mass 1

|H2|
1

zeta = 0.0085975
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Frequency Hz

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Results for h = 0.002 == A ⁄ h = 5
Advanced Vibrations

−5 Frequency Response of 2−Mass System with Damping


x 10
1.2

A/h = 5

0.8 zeta = 0.055152


|FRF| Mass 1

|H1|
0.6

0.4

0.2 |H2|

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Frequency Hz

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Results from many calculations
Advanced Vibrations

0.12

Mode 2
0.1

0.08

ζ
0.06 Mode 1

0.04

0.02

0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5

A/h
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
What do we observe from the above?
Advanced Vibrations

We note the following


• Increasing thickness drops the resonant frequencies. Decreasing
thickness raises natural frequencies.

• The second mode, which is associated with toward each other, is


suppressed as the thickness is decreased. What is happening.

• The first mode, which is associated with masses moving in the


same direction, does have a configuration of maximum damping.

• Optimal damping appears to happen in the vicinity of h = 0.005 m


(5.0 mm)

What do we imagine to the limiting mode as h → 0?

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Final Note
Advanced Vibrations

This would be only a marginally good candidate for the modal strain
energy method.

The reason is that the viscoelastic represents an appreciable part of the


stiffness of the structure. That means that the stiffnesses are
appreciably different at different frequencies.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/ProblemE.frm
Take Home Final Exam
A Damping Problem
Advanced Vibrations

You may use any references, but do not ask anyone for help.
Please put you finished exams in an envelope and place that in my mail
slot no later than noon Wednesday 16 December 1998.

We consider a structure such as that shown below


K
K
M M

A, h
u2 u1

We have two masses, two springs, and a shear damper.The cross


sectional area of the damper is A and the thickness of the damping
material is h . The damping material is that discussed earlier. For
8
M = 300 kg; K = 1.0 ×10 N/m; A = 0.01 m2, and h = 0.01 m
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/TakeHomeFinal.frm
Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Use Matlab in any parts of the following that you wish


1. Solving the governing equation in frequency space, plot the
magnitude of the driving point frequency response function versus
frequency.

2. From the above, calculate the fraction of critical damping for each
mode using half-power points.

3. Using the modal strain energy method, calculate the fraction of


critical damping for each mode. These should be similar to the
values calculated above.

4. Find the elastic eigenmodes and frequencies. You may ignore the
slider for this, but you must tell me why.

5. Assuming modal damping, solve the problem for the following


initial conditions:
u 1 ( 0 ) = 0 , u 2 ( 0 ) = 0 , u̇ 1 ( 0 ) = 1 , u 2 ( 0 ) = 0 ,
and plot u̇ 1 ( t ) and u̇ 2 ( t ) for several cycles of the lower frequency.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/TakeHomeFinal.frm
The Damping Material
Advanced Vibrations

The following plot for polyisobutylene is taken from “Vibration


Damping” by Nashif et. al.

E’=3G’

tan(δ)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/8/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/TakeHomeFinal.frm
Interpolating Functions
Advanced Vibrations

ω 5
We can fit the above plots reasonably well in 0.1 < ------ < 10 by

ω 3.3
Log ( 3G' ( ω ) ) = Log ( E' ( ω ) ) = 6.2 + 0.0112  Log  ------  or
  2π 

  ω   3.3
5.72 + 0.0112 Log ------
  2π 
G' ( ω ) = 10 and

 ω   ω  2
Log ( tan δ ( ω ) ) = – 1 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ so
 2π   2π 

G'' ( ω ) = G' ( ω ) tan δ ( ω )


 ω   ω  2   ω   3.3
4.72 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ + 0.0112 Log ------
 2π   2π    2π 
= 10
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/8/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/TakeHomeFinal.frm
Take Home Final Exam
A Damping Problem
Advanced Vibrations

You may use any references, but do not ask anyone for help.
Please put you finished exams in an envelope and place that in my mail
slot no later than noon Wednesday 16 December 1998.

We consider a structure such as that shown below


K
K
M M

A, h
u2 u1

We have two masses, two springs, and a shear damper.The cross


sectional area of the damper is A and the thickness of the damping
material is h . The damping material is that discussed earlier. For
8
M = 300 kg; K = 1.0 ×10 N/m; A = 0.01 m2, and h = 0.01 m
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 1 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Problem
Advanced Vibrations

Use Matlab in any parts of the following that you wish


1. Solving the governing equation in frequency space, plot the
magnitude of the driving point frequency response function versus
frequency.

2. From the above, calculate the fraction of critical damping for each
mode using half-power points.

3. Find the elastic eigenmodes and frequencies. You may ignore the
slider for this, but you must tell me why.

4. Using the modal strain energy method, calculate the fraction of


critical damping for each mode. These should be similar to the
values calculated above.

5. Assuming modal damping, solve the problem for the following


initial conditions: u 1 ( 0 ) = 0 , u 2 ( 0 ) = 0 , u̇ 1 ( 0 ) = 1 ,
u 2 ( 0 ) = 0 ,and plot u̇ 1 ( t ) and u̇ 2 ( t ) for several cycles of the
lower frequency.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 2 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
The Damping Material
Advanced Vibrations

The following plot for polyisobutylene is taken from “Vibration


Damping” by Nashif et. al.

E’=3G’

tan(δ)

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 3 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Interpolating Functions
Advanced Vibrations

ω 5
We can fit the above plots reasonably well in 0.1 < ------ < 10 by

ω 3.3
Log ( 3G' ( ω ) ) = Log ( E' ( ω ) ) = 6.2 + 0.0112  Log  ------  or
  2π 

  ω   3.3
5.72 + 0.0112 Log ------
  2π 
G' ( ω ) = 10 and

 ω   ω  2
Log ( tan δ ( ω ) ) = – 1 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ so
 2π   2π 

G'' ( ω ) = G' ( ω ) tan δ ( ω )


 ω   ω  2   ω   3.3
4.72 + 0.56Log ------ – 0.069 Log ------ + 0.0112 Log ------
 2π   2π    2π 
= 10
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 4 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution Part 1
Advanced Vibrations

1. Solving the governing equation in frequency space, plot the


magnitude of the driving point frequency response function versus
frequency.

2. From the above, calculate the fraction of critical damping for each
mode using half-power points.

In frequency space, the governing equation is

U1 k –k U1 F1(ω)
–ω M
2
+ A =
M U2 – k 2k + G∗ ( ω ) --- U 2 F2(ω)
h

U1 F1(ω)
We write this as A(ω) = . The frequency response
U2 F2(ω)

is found by inverting A(ω) .


Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 5 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 1
Advanced Vibrations

U1 –1 F1(ω) F1(ω)
= A(ω) = H (ω)
U2 F2(ω) F2(ω)
Say we apply we apply the driving force to mass 1, then the driving
point frequency response is H 11 ( ω ) . If we drive mass 2, the driving
point frequency response is H 22 ( ω ) .
Both driving point frequency response functions are plotted in the
following figure. The fractions of critical damping are calculated from
H 11 ( ω ) , but the damping numbers are identical when computed from
H 22 ( ω ) .
A very fine discretization in frequency space is necessary to converge
on the fractions of critical damping. Thirty intervals/Hz were used to
calculate the following.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 6 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 2
Advanced Vibrations

−6 Frequency Response of 2−Mass System with Damping


x 10
8

6
A/h = 1

5 zeta = 0.0014567
|FRF| Mass 1

zeta = 0.00083563
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Frequency Hz

Computed damping is 0.15% and 0.084% for the first and second mode,
respectively.
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 7 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution Part 2
Advanced Vibrations

The reason why computed damping does not depend on which mass is
driven becomes clear when we examine the modal expression for nodal
displacement:

T
Pk ( Pk F ( ω ) )
X ( ω ) = ∑ ---------------------------------------------------
2 2
-
k ( ω k – ω ) + 2iζ k ωω k

When the system is driven at frequency ω , only those modes with


frequency in that vicinity are excited. We see that all of the physical
nodes will move proportionally in response to that excitation. Hence the
half-power calculation for damping will be independent of which node is
excited.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 8 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 3
Advanced Vibrations

Compute elastic eigen modes and frequencies.


From the analysis of part 1, the eigen problem is

U1 k –k U1
–ω M = 0
2
+ A
M U2 ∗
– k 2k + G ( ω ) --- U 2 0
h
In the frequency range of interest,
A A 5 8
--- G′′ ( ω ) < --- G′ ( ω ) < 8.0 ×10 N ⁄ m « k = 1.0 ×10 N ⁄ m
h h
and it is not anticipated that the damper will significantly affect the
natural frequencies or modes.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 9 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 3
Advanced Vibrations

The eigen problem can be made non-dimensional

2
1–α –1 U1
= 0 where
2 2  M
α = ω ----- .
2 U2 0  K
–1 2–α

 3 – 5 3 + 5
2
The eigen values are α = ----------------, ---------------- = ( 0.382, 2.62 )
 2 2 
In terms of angular frequency,
2 2 K  5 5
ω = α ----- = ( 1.27 ×10 , 8.73 ×10 ) .
 M

The natural frequencies are ( ω 1, ω 2 ) = ( 357, 934 ) and


1
( f 1, f 2 ) = ------ ( ω 1, ω 2 ) = ( 56.8, 149 )Hz

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 10 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 3
Advanced Vibrations

The corresponding eigenvectors are

 1 1 
   1 1 
 5–1 , 5 + 1  =  , .
 ---------------- – ----------------   0.618 – 1.62 
 2 2 
These have not been normalized. They do not have to be for this
application, but we shall normalize them later on.

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 11 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 4
Modal Strain Energy for First Mode
Advanced Vibrations

The first mode looks like


1 and occurs at a
0.618
ω 1 = 357, f 1 = 56.8Hz .
The maximum strain energy in a cycle of this mode is
k 2 k 2 6
E S = --- ( 1 – 0.618 ) + --- ( 0.618 ) = 26.4 ×10 NM
2 2
The maximum energy dissipated in a cycle in of this mode is

A 2 6 2 6
E D = π --- G'' ( ω ) ( 0.618 ) = π0.365 ×10 ( 0.618 ) = 0.438 ×10
h

η ED
ζ = --- = ------------- = 0.0013
2 4πE S
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 12 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 4
Modal Strain Energy for Second Mode
Advanced Vibrations

The first mode looks like


1 and occurs at a
– 1.62
ω 2 = 934, f 2 = 149Hz .
The maximum strain energy in a cycle of this mode is
k 2 k 2 8
E S = --- ( 1 + 1.62 ) + --- ( 1.62 ) = 4.74 ×10 Nm
2 2
The maximum energy dissipated in a cycle in of this mode is

A 2 5 2 6
E D = π --- G'' ( ω ) ( 1.62 ) = π ( 1 )5.7 ×10 ( 1.62 ) = 4.7 ×10 Nm
h

η ED
ζ = --- = ------------- = 0.00079
2 4πE S
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 13 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Solution with initial conditions
Advanced Vibrations

From this point on, we shall need to normalize the eigen modes.

Recall that the physical degrees of freedom and the modal coordinates

x1 ( t ) β1 ( t ) T
are related by = P where P MP = I and
x2 ( t ) β2 ( t )

2
T ω1 0
P KP = .
2
0 ω2
Normalizing the eigen solutions calculated earlier,

P = 4.91 – 3.04 ×10


–2
3.04 4.91
Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998
12/21/98 14 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Solution with initial conditions
Advanced Vibrations

There are no forcing terms, so the modal equations are of the form

2
β̇˙n + 2ζω n β̇ n + ω n β n = 0 .
Since this is an “under damped” system, the solution is
–ζn ωn t 2 2
βn ( t ) = e [ C n cos ( tω n 1 – ζ n ) + D n sin ( tω n 1 – ζn ) ] .

The time derivative of β n is

β̇ n ( t ) =
–ζn ωn t 2 2
–ζn ωn e [ C n cos ( tω n 1 – ζn ) + D n sin ( tω n 1 – ζn ) ]
2 –ζn ωn t 2 2
+ ωn 1 – ζn ( e [ D n cos ( tω n 1 – ζ n ) – C n sin ( tω n 1 – ζ n ) ] )

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 15 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Solution with initial conditions
Advanced Vibrations

Substituting into our equation for physical displacements,

x1 ( t )
= 0.0491 β 1 ( t ) + – 0.0304 β 2 ( t )
x2 ( t ) 0.0304 0.0491

x1 ( 0 ) ẋ 1 ( 0 )
Our initial conditions are = 0 and = 1 .
x2 ( 0 ) 0 ẋ 2 ( 0 ) 0
In terms of our modal coordinates,

x1 ( 0 )
= 0.0491 C 1 ( 0 ) + – 0.0304 C 2 ( 0 )
x2 ( 0 ) 0.0304 0.0491

and we conclude that C1 = C2 = 0 .

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 16 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Solution with initial conditions
Advanced Vibrations

ẋ 1 ( 0 ) 0.0491 2
= ω1 1 – ζ1 D1
ẋ 2 ( 0 ) 0.0304

+ – 0.0304 2
ω2 1 – ζ2 D2
0.0491

= 17.6 D 1 + – 28.4 D 2 = 1
10.9 46 0

which is solved D 1 = 0.041, D 2 = – 0.010

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 17 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Solution with initial conditions
Advanced Vibrations

The calculated displacement is

x1 ( t ) 0.00202 – 0.52t
= e sin ( t358 )
x2 ( t ) 0.00125

+ 0.00030 e
– 0.78t
sin ( t935 )
– 0.00048

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 18 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Computed Displacements
Advanced Vibrations

−3
x 10
2.5

Displacement 1
2

Displacement 2
1.5

0.5

−0.5

−1

−1.5

−2

−2.5
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 19 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm
Solution: Part 5
Computed Velocities
Advanced Vibrations

1.5

Velocity 1
Velocity 2
1

0.5

−0.5

−1
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12

Copyright Dan Segalman, 1998


12/21/98 20 /home/djsegal/UNM/VibCourse/slides/
TakeHomeFinalSolution.frm

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen